1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2009-08-14.15} 7% 8% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 9% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 10% 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 11% 12% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 13% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 14% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 15% License, or (at your option) any later version. 16% 17% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 18% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 19% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 20% General Public License for more details. 21% 22% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 23% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 24% 25% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 26% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 27% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) 28% 29% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 30% reports; you can get the latest version from: 31% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or 32% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex 33% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). 34% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 35% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 36% 37% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a 38% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 39% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 40% 41% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 42% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 43% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 44% tex foo.texi 45% texindex foo.?? 46% tex foo.texi 47% tex foo.texi 48% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 49% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 50% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 51% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 52% 53% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 54% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 55% full Texinfo distribution. 56% 57% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 58 59 60\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 61 62% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 63% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 64% they might have appeared in the input file name. 65\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 66 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 67 68 69\chardef\other=12 70 71% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 72% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 73\let\+ = \relax 74 75% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 76\let\ptexb=\b 77\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 78\let\ptexc=\c 79\let\ptexcomma=\, 80\let\ptexdot=\. 81\let\ptexdots=\dots 82\let\ptexend=\end 83\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 84\let\ptexexclam=\! 85\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 86\let\ptexgtr=> 87\let\ptexhat=^ 88\let\ptexi=\i 89\let\ptexindent=\indent 90\let\ptexinsert=\insert 91\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 92\let\ptexless=< 93\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 94\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 95\let\ptexplus=+ 96\let\ptexrbrace=\} 97\let\ptexslash=\/ 98\let\ptexstar=\* 99\let\ptext=\t 100\let\ptextop=\top 101{\catcode`\'=\active 102\global\let\ptexquoteright'}% Math-mode def from plain.tex. 103\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright 104 105% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 106% starts a new line in the output. 107\newlinechar = `^^J 108 109% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 110% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 111% 112\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 113 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 114\else 115 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 116\fi 117 118% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 119\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 120\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 121\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 122\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 123\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 124\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 125\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 126\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 127\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 128\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 129\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 130\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 131\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 132\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 133\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 134\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 135\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 136\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 137\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 138% 139\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 140\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 141\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 142\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 143\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 144\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 145\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 146\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 147\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 148\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 149\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 150\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 151% 152\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 153\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 154\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 155\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 156\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 157 158% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. 159\chardef\spacecat = 10 160\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} 161 162% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences. 163\chardef\colonChar = `\: 164\chardef\commaChar = `\, 165\chardef\dashChar = `\- 166\chardef\dotChar = `\. 167\chardef\exclamChar= `\! 168\chardef\lquoteChar= `\` 169\chardef\questChar = `\? 170\chardef\rquoteChar= `\' 171\chardef\semiChar = `\; 172\chardef\underChar = `\_ 173 174% Ignore a token. 175% 176\def\gobble#1{} 177 178% The following is used inside several \edef's. 179\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 180 181% Hyphenation fixes. 182\hyphenation{ 183 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 184 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 185 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 186 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 187 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 188 spell-ing spell-ings 189 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 190 wide-spread wrap-around 191} 192 193% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 194\newdimen\bindingoffset 195\newdimen\normaloffset 196\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight 197 198% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 199% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 200% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 201% 202\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} 203 204% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should 205% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the 206% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would 207% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main 208% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). 209% 210\def\|{% 211 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. 212 \leavevmode 213 % 214 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. 215 \vadjust{% 216 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current 217 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. 218 \vskip-\baselineskip 219 % 220 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So 221 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. 222 \llap{% 223 % 224 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. 225 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt 226 % 227 % This is the space between the bar and the text. 228 \hskip 12pt 229 }% 230 }% 231} 232 233% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 234% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 235% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 236% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 237% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 238% 239\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 240\def\loggingall{% 241 \tracingstats2 242 \tracingpages1 243 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 244 \tracingparagraphs1 245 \tracingoutput1 246 \tracingmacros2 247 \tracingrestores1 248 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 249 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging 250 \tracingscantokens1 251 \tracingifs1 252 \tracinggroups1 253 \tracingnesting2 254 \tracingassigns1 255 \fi 256 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 257 \errorcontextlines16 258}% 259 260% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 261% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 262% 263\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 264 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 265\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 266 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 267\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 268 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 269 270% For @cropmarks command. 271% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. 272% 273\newif\ifcropmarks 274\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue 275% 276% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. 277% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 278% 279\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 280\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc 281\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt 282\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 283 284% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 285% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 286% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 287% 288% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 289% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 290% 291% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 292% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 293% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is 294% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two 295% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and 296% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK... 297\def\domark{% 298 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% 299 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% 300 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 301 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 302 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% 303 \mark{% 304 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 305 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 306 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 307 }% 308} 309% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 310% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 311% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 312% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 313% first @chapter. 314\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 315 \ifcase0\topmark\fi 316 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 317} 318\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 319\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} 320 321% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 322\def\lastchapterdefs{} 323\def\lastsectiondefs{} 324\def\prevchapterdefs{} 325\def\prevsectiondefs{} 326\def\lastcolordefs{} 327 328% Main output routine. 329\chardef\PAGE = 255 330\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 331 332\newbox\headlinebox 333\newbox\footlinebox 334 335% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents 336% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. 337\def\onepageout#1{% 338 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi 339 % 340 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 341 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 342 % 343 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 344 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 345 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 346 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% 347 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 348 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% 349 % 350 {% 351 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 352 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 353 % before the \shipout runs. 354 % 355 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 356 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if 357 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. 358 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: 359 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} 360 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; 361 % it needs to be 362 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} 363 \shipout\vbox{% 364 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 365 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 366 % 367 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup 368 \hsize = \outerhsize 369 \vskip-\topandbottommargin 370 \vtop to0pt{% 371 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% 372 \nointerlineskip 373 \line{% 374 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% 375 \hfill 376 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% 377 }% 378 \vss}% 379 \vskip\topandbottommargin 380 \line\bgroup 381 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. 382 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi 383 \vbox\bgroup 384 \fi 385 % 386 \unvbox\headlinebox 387 \pagebody{#1}% 388 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 389 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 390 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 391 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 392 \vskip 24pt 393 \unvbox\footlinebox 394 \fi 395 % 396 \ifcropmarks 397 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup 398 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup 399 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill 400 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick 401 \vbox to0pt{\vss 402 \line{% 403 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% 404 \hfill 405 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% 406 }% 407 \nointerlineskip 408 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% 409 }% 410 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause 411 \fi 412 }% end of \shipout\vbox 413 }% end of group with \indexdummies 414 \advancepageno 415 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 416} 417 418\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 419 420\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 421{\catcode`\@ =11 422\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 423% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 424\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 425 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 426\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 427\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 428\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 429} 430 431% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are 432% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize 433% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) 434% 435\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} 436\def\nstop{\vbox 437 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} 438\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} 439\def\nsbot{\vbox 440 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} 441 442% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 443% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 444% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 445% 446\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 447\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 448 \def\argtorun{#2}% 449 \begingroup 450 \obeylines 451 \spaceisspace 452 #1% 453 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 454} 455 456{\obeylines % 457 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 458 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 459 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 460 }% 461} 462 463% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. 464\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 465\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 466 467% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 468% 469% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 470% @end itemize @c foo 471% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 472% by \finishparsearg. 473% 474\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 475\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 476\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 477 \def\temp{#3}% 478 \ifx\temp\empty 479 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 480 \let\temp\finishparsearg 481 \else 482 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 483 \fi 484 % Put the space token in: 485 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 486} 487 488% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 489% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 490% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 491% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 492% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 493% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 494% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 495% 496% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 497% 498\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 499 500% \parseargdef\foo{...} 501% is roughly equivalent to 502% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 503% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 504% 505% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my 506% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 507 508\def\parseargdef#1{% 509 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 510} 511\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 512 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 513 \def#1##1% 514} 515 516% Several utility definitions with active space: 517{ 518 \obeyspaces 519 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 520 521 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 522 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 523 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 524 % should produce a line of output anyway. 525 % 526 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 527 528 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 529 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 530 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 531 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 532} 533 534 535\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 536 537% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 538% 539% \envdef\foo{...} 540% \def\Efoo{...} 541% 542% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 543% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 544% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 545% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 546% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 547% 548% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 549% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 550% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 551% special case.) 552 553 554% At run-time, environments start with this: 555\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 556% initialize 557\let\thisenv\empty 558 559% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 560\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 561\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 562 563% Check whether we're in the right environment: 564\def\checkenv#1{% 565 \def\temp{#1}% 566 \ifx\thisenv\temp 567 \else 568 \badenverr 569 \fi 570} 571 572% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 573\def\badenverr{% 574 \errhelp = \EMsimple 575 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 576 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 577} 578\def\inenvironment#1{% 579 \ifx#1\empty 580 out of any environment% 581 \else 582 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 583 \fi 584} 585 586% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 587% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 588% 589\parseargdef\end{% 590 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 591 \else 592 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 593 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 594 \csname E#1\endcsname 595 \endgroup 596 \fi 597} 598 599\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 600 601 602%% Simple single-character @ commands 603 604% @@ prints an @ 605% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). 606\def\@{{\tt\char64}} 607 608% This is turned off because it was never documented 609% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. 610%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' 611%% but suppressing ligatures. 612%\def\`{{`}} 613%\def\'{{'}} 614 615% Used to generate quoted braces. 616\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} 617\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} 618\let\{=\mylbrace 619\let\}=\myrbrace 620\begingroup 621 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, 622 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. 623 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other 624 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 625 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other 626 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% 627 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% 628 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% 629 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% 630!endgroup 631 632% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 633\let\comma = , 634 635% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 636% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 637\let\, = \c 638\let\dotaccent = \. 639\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 640\let\tieaccent = \t 641\let\ubaraccent = \b 642\let\udotaccent = \d 643 644% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 645% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 646\def\questiondown{?`} 647\def\exclamdown{!`} 648\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} 649\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} 650 651% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 652\def\imacro{i} 653\def\jmacro{j} 654\def\dotless#1{% 655 \def\temp{#1}% 656 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 657 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 658 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 659 \fi\fi 660} 661 662% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 663% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 664% 665\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 666 667% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 668% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 669% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 670% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 671% \scriptscriptstyle). 672% 673\def\LaTeX{% 674 L\kern-.36em 675 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 676 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% 677 \kern-.15em 678 \TeX 679} 680 681% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 682% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 683% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 684% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 685% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 686{\catcode`@ = 11 687 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 688 % if the definition is written into an index file. 689 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 690 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 691} 692 693% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 694\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 695 696% @* forces a line break. 697\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 698 699% @/ allows a line break. 700\let\/=\allowbreak 701 702% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 703\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 704 705% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 706\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 707 708% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 709\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 710 711% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 712% 713\def\onword{on} 714\def\offword{off} 715% 716\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 717 \def\temp{#1}% 718 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 719 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 720 \else 721 \errhelp = \EMsimple 722 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}% 723 \fi\fi 724} 725 726% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 727% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 728% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 729\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 730 731% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 732% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 733% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 734% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 735% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 736% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 737% the text is small, which looks bad. 738% 739% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 740% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 741% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 742% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 743% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 744% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 745% 746\newbox\groupbox 747\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 748% 749\envdef\group{% 750 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 751 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 752 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 753 \fi 754 \startsavinginserts 755 % 756 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 757 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 758 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 759 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 760 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 761 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 762 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 763 \comment 764} 765% 766% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 767% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 768% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 769% above. But it's pretty close. 770\def\Egroup{% 771 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 772 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 773 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 774 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 775 \egroup % End the \vtop. 776 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 777 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 778 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 779 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 780 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 781 % group, force a page break. 782 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 783 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight 784 \page 785 \fi 786 \fi 787 \box\groupbox 788 \prevdepth = \dimen1 789 \checkinserts 790} 791% 792% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 793% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 794% 795\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 796group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 797where each line of input produces a line of output.} 798 799% @need space-in-mils 800% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 801 802\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 803 804% Old definition--didn't work. 805%\parseargdef\need{\par % 806%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally 807%% if the depth of the box does not fit. 808%{\baselineskip=0pt% 809%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak 810%\prevdepth=-1000pt 811%}} 812 813\parseargdef\need{% 814 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 815 % paragraph. 816 \par 817 % 818 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 819 \dimen0 = #1\mil 820 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 821 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 822 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 823 % 824 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 825 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 826 % And a page break here is fine. 827 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 828 % 829 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 830 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 831 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 832 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 833 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 834 % 835 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 836 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 837 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 838 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 839 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 840 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 841 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 842 \penalty9999 843 % 844 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 845 \kern -#1\mil 846 % 847 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 848 \nobreak 849 \fi 850} 851 852% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 853 854\let\br = \par 855 856% @page forces the start of a new page. 857% 858\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 859 860% @exdent text.... 861% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 862 863% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 864% That's how much \exdent should take out. 865\newskip\exdentamount 866 867% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 868\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 869 870% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 871\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 872 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 873 874% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 875% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 876% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. 877% 878\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 879\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 880% 881\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 882 \nobreak 883 \kern-\strutdepth 884 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 885 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 886 \vss 887 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 888 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 889 \ifx#1l% 890 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 891 \else 892 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 893 \fi 894 \null 895 }% 896}} 897\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 898\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 899% 900% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 901% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 902% else use TEXT for both). 903% 904\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 905\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 906 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 907 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 908 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 909 \def\righttext{#2}% 910 \else 911 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 912 \def\righttext{#1}% 913 \fi 914 % 915 \ifodd\pageno 916 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 917 \else 918 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 919 \fi 920 \temp 921} 922 923% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 924% 925\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 926\def\includezzz#1{% 927 \pushthisfilestack 928 \def\thisfile{#1}% 929 {% 930 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 931 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 932 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 933 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 934 % 935 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 936 % definitions, etc. 937 \expandafter 938 }\temp 939 \popthisfilestack 940} 941\def\filenamecatcodes{% 942 \catcode`\\=\other 943 \catcode`~=\other 944 \catcode`^=\other 945 \catcode`_=\other 946 \catcode`|=\other 947 \catcode`<=\other 948 \catcode`>=\other 949 \catcode`+=\other 950 \catcode`-=\other 951 \catcode`\`=\other 952 \catcode`\'=\other 953} 954 955\def\pushthisfilestack{% 956 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 957} 958\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 959 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 960} 961\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 962 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 963} 964 965\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 966\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 967 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 968 969\def\thisfile{} 970 971% @center line 972% outputs that line, centered. 973% 974\parseargdef\center{% 975 \ifhmode 976 \let\next\centerH 977 \else 978 \let\next\centerV 979 \fi 980 \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 981} 982\def\centerH#1{% 983 {% 984 \hfil\break 985 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 986 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 987 \line{#1}% 988 \break 989 }% 990} 991\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} 992 993% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 994 995\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 996 997% @comment ...line which is ignored... 998% @c is the same as @comment 999% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 1000 1001\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% 1002\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 1003\commentxxx} 1004{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 1005 1006\let\c=\comment 1007 1008% @paragraphindent NCHARS 1009% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 1010% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 1011% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 1012% 1013\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 1014\def\noneword{none} 1015% 1016\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 1017 \def\temp{#1}% 1018 \ifx\temp\asisword 1019 \else 1020 \ifx\temp\noneword 1021 \defaultparindent = 0pt 1022 \else 1023 \defaultparindent = #1em 1024 \fi 1025 \fi 1026 \parindent = \defaultparindent 1027} 1028 1029% @exampleindent NCHARS 1030% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 1031% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 1032% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 1033\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 1034 \def\temp{#1}% 1035 \ifx\temp\asisword 1036 \else 1037 \ifx\temp\noneword 1038 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 1039 \else 1040 \lispnarrowing = #1em 1041 \fi 1042 \fi 1043} 1044 1045% @firstparagraphindent WORD 1046% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 1047% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 1048% paragraphs. 1049% 1050% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 1051% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 1052% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 1053% By default, we suppress indentation. 1054% 1055\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 1056\def\insertword{insert} 1057% 1058\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 1059 \def\temp{#1}% 1060 \ifx\temp\noneword 1061 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 1062 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 1063 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 1064 \else 1065 \errhelp = \EMsimple 1066 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 1067 \fi\fi 1068} 1069 1070% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 1071% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 1072% 1073% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 1074% paragraph. 1075% 1076\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 1077 \gdef\indent{% 1078 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1079 \indent 1080 }% 1081 \gdef\noindent{% 1082 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1083 \noindent 1084 }% 1085 \global\everypar = {% 1086 \kern -\parindent 1087 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1088 }% 1089} 1090 1091\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1092 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent 1093 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent 1094 \global \everypar = {}% 1095} 1096 1097 1098% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 1099% 1100\def\asis#1{#1} 1101 1102% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 1103% 1104% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 1105% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 1106% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 1107% which is what @var uses. 1108{ 1109 \catcode`\_ = \active 1110 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 1111 \catcode`\_=\active 1112 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 1113 } 1114} 1115% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. 1116% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but 1117% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not 1118% otherwise define @\. 1119% 1120% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 1121\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 1122% 1123\def\math{% 1124 \tex 1125 \mathunderscore 1126 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 1127 \mathactive 1128 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 1129 \let\"=\ddot 1130 \let\'=\acute 1131 \let\==\bar 1132 \let\^=\hat 1133 \let\`=\grave 1134 \let\u=\breve 1135 \let\v=\check 1136 \let\~=\tilde 1137 \let\dotaccent=\dot 1138 $\finishmath 1139} 1140\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 1141 1142% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 1143% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 1144% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 1145% 1146{ 1147 \catcode`^ = \active 1148 \catcode`< = \active 1149 \catcode`> = \active 1150 \catcode`+ = \active 1151 \catcode`' = \active 1152 \gdef\mathactive{% 1153 \let^ = \ptexhat 1154 \let< = \ptexless 1155 \let> = \ptexgtr 1156 \let+ = \ptexplus 1157 \let' = \ptexquoteright 1158 } 1159} 1160 1161% Some math mode symbols. 1162\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} 1163\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi} 1164\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi} 1165\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi} 1166 1167% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 1168% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 1169% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 1170% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 1171% whichever is larger. 1172% 1173\def\dots{% 1174 \leavevmode 1175 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 1176 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 1177 \dimen0 = \wd0 1178 \else 1179 \dimen0 = 1.5em 1180 \fi 1181 \hbox to \dimen0{% 1182 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 1183 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 1184 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 1185 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 1186 }% 1187} 1188 1189% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 1190% 1191\def\enddots{% 1192 \dots 1193 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 1194} 1195 1196% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up 1197% Texinfo's parsing. 1198% 1199\let\comma = , 1200 1201% @refill is a no-op. 1202\let\refill=\relax 1203 1204% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 1205% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 1206% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). 1207% 1208\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 1209\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 1210 1211% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. 1212% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. 1213% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. 1214\def\setfilename{% 1215 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. 1216 \iflinks 1217 \tryauxfile 1218 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 1219 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 1220 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. 1221 \openindices 1222 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. 1223 % 1224 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 1225 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. 1226 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf 1227 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi 1228 \closein 1 1229 % 1230 \comment % Ignore the actual filename. 1231} 1232 1233% Called from \setfilename. 1234% 1235\def\openindices{% 1236 \newindex{cp}% 1237 \newcodeindex{fn}% 1238 \newcodeindex{vr}% 1239 \newcodeindex{tp}% 1240 \newcodeindex{ky}% 1241 \newcodeindex{pg}% 1242} 1243 1244% @bye. 1245\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1246 1247 1248\message{pdf,} 1249% adobe `portable' document format 1250\newcount\tempnum 1251\newcount\lnkcount 1252\newtoks\filename 1253\newcount\filenamelength 1254\newcount\pgn 1255\newtoks\toksA 1256\newtoks\toksB 1257\newtoks\toksC 1258\newtoks\toksD 1259\newbox\boxA 1260\newcount\countA 1261\newif\ifpdf 1262\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1263 1264% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1265% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, 1266% borrowed from ifpdf.sty. 1267\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined 1268\else 1269 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1270 \else 1271 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1272 \else 1273 \pdftrue 1274 \fi 1275 \fi 1276\fi 1277 1278% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1279% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1280% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1281% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1282% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html 1283% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX 1284% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1285% that's what we do). 1286 1287% double active backslashes. 1288% 1289{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active 1290 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{% 1291 @catcode`@\=@active 1292 @let\=@doublebackslash} 1293} 1294 1295% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are 1296% not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as 1297% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor 1298% changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission 1299% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek. 1300% 1301% #1 is the tokens to replace. 1302% #2 is the replacement. 1303% #3 is the control sequence with the string. 1304% 1305\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{% 1306 \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{% 1307 ##1% 1308 \ifx\\##2\\% 1309 \else 1310 #2% 1311 \HyReturnAfterFi{% 1312 \HyPsdReplace##2\END 1313 }% 1314 \fi 1315 }% 1316 \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}% 1317} 1318\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1} 1319 1320% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements. 1321\def\backslashparens#1{% 1322 \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply 1323 % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest. 1324 \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}% 1325 \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}% 1326} 1327 1328\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1329with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1330be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1331output) for that.)} 1332 1333\ifpdf 1334 % 1335 % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex, 1336 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a 1337 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead 1338 % of actual black. 1339 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1340 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1341 % 1342 % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); 1343 % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). 1344 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} 1345 % 1346 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1347 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1348 \def\setcolor#1{% 1349 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1350 \domark 1351 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1352 } 1353 % 1354 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1355 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1356 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1357 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1358 % 1359 \def\makefootline{% 1360 \baselineskip24pt 1361 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1362 } 1363 % 1364 \def\makeheadline{% 1365 \vbox to 0pt{% 1366 \vskip-22.5pt 1367 \line{% 1368 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1369 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1370 \getcolormarks 1371 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1372 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1373 }% 1374 \vss 1375 }% 1376 \nointerlineskip 1377 } 1378 % 1379 % 1380 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1381 % 1382 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1383 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1384 \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1385 \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1386 % 1387 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among 1388 % others). Let's try in that order. 1389 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1390 \begingroup 1391 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1392 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1393 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1394 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1395 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1396 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1397 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1398 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1399 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1400 \fi 1401 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1402 \fi 1403 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1404 \fi 1405 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1406 \fi 1407 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1408 \fi 1409 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1410 \fi 1411 \closein 1 1412 \endgroup 1413 % 1414 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1415 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1416 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1417 \immediate\pdfimage 1418 \else 1419 \immediate\pdfximage 1420 \fi 1421 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi 1422 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi 1423 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1424 #1.\pdfimgext 1425 \else 1426 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1427 \fi 1428 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1429 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1430 \fi} 1431 % 1432 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% 1433 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1434 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1435 \indexnofonts 1436 \turnoffactive 1437 \activebackslashdouble 1438 \makevalueexpandable 1439 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1440 \backslashparens\pdfdestname 1441 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1442 }} 1443 % 1444 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1445 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1446 % 1447 % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as 1448 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. 1449 \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed} 1450 \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed} 1451 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1452 % 1453 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1454 % come from Petr Olsak 1455 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1456 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1457 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1458 \advance\tempnum by 1 1459 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1460 % 1461 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1462 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1463 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1464 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1465 % #4 is the page number 1466 % 1467 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1468 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1469 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1470 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1471 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1472 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% 1473 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty 1474 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% 1475 \else 1476 % Doubled backslashes in the name. 1477 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% 1478 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}% 1479 \fi 1480 % 1481 % Also double the backslashes in the display string. 1482 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1483 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}% 1484 % 1485 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1486 } 1487 % 1488 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1489 \begingroup 1490 % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks 1491 \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace 1492 \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace 1493 % 1494 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1495 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1496 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1497 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1498 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1499 }% 1500 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1501 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1502 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1503 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1504 }% 1505 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1506 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1507 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1508 }% 1509 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1510 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1511 }% 1512 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1513 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1514 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1515 % 1516 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1517 % al. a second time, below. 1518 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1519 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1520 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1521 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1522 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1523 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1524 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1525 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1526 \readdatafile{toc}% 1527 % 1528 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1529 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1530 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1531 % 1532 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1533 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1534 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1535 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1536 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1537 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1538 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1539 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1540 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1541 % 1542 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1543 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1544 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1545 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1546 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1547 % 1548 % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1549 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right 1550 % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. 1551 \indexnofonts 1552 \setupdatafile 1553 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1554 \input \tocreadfilename 1555 \endgroup 1556 } 1557 % 1558 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1559 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1560 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1561 \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1562 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1563 \fi 1564 \fi 1565 \nextsp} 1566 \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} 1567 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1568 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1569 \else 1570 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1571 \fi 1572 % make a live url in pdf output. 1573 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1574 \begingroup 1575 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1576 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1577 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1578 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1579 % 1580 \normalturnoffactive 1581 \def\@{@}% 1582 \let\/=\empty 1583 \makevalueexpandable 1584 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1585 % special-casing \var here? 1586 \def\var##1{##1}% 1587 % 1588 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1589 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1590 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1591 \endgroup} 1592 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1593 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1594 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1595 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1596 \def\maketoks{% 1597 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1598 \ifx\first0\adn0 1599 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1600 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1601 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1602 \else 1603 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1604 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1605 \let\next=\maketoks 1606 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1607 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1608 \fi 1609 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1610 \next} 1611 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1612 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1613 \def\pdflink#1{% 1614 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1615 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1616 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1617\else 1618 % non-pdf mode 1619 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1620 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1621 \let\endlink = \relax 1622 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1623 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1624 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1625\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1626 1627 1628\message{fonts,} 1629 1630% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 1631% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 1632% italics, not bold italics. 1633% 1634\def\setfontstyle#1{% 1635 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 1636 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font 1637} 1638 1639% Select #1 fonts with the current style. 1640% 1641\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} 1642 1643\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 1644\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 1645\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 1646\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 1647\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 1648 1649% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since 1650% in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh. 1651\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}} 1652 1653% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 1654% So we set up a \sf. 1655\newfam\sffam 1656\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 1657\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. 1658 1659% We don't need math for this font style. 1660\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 1661 1662 1663% Default leading. 1664\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt 1665 1666% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1667% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1668% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1669% 1670\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1671\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1672\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1673% 1674% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1675\def\baselinefactor{1} 1676% 1677\def\setleading#1{% 1678 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1679 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1680 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1681 \normalbaselines 1682 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1683 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1684 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1685 }% 1686} 1687 1688% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1689% 1690% do nothing with this by default. 1691\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1692\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1693\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1694 1695% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1696% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1697% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1698\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else 1699 \begingroup 1700 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1701 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1702%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1703%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1704%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1705%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1706%%Version: 1.000 1707%%EndComments 1708/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 170912 dict begin 1710begincmap 1711/CIDSystemInfo 1712<< /Registry (TeX) 1713/Ordering (OT1) 1714/Supplement 0 1715>> def 1716/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1717/CMapType 2 def 17181 begincodespacerange 1719<00> <7F> 1720endcodespacerange 17218 beginbfrange 1722<00> <01> <0393> 1723<09> <0A> <03A8> 1724<23> <26> <0023> 1725<28> <3B> <0028> 1726<3F> <5B> <003F> 1727<5D> <5E> <005D> 1728<61> <7A> <0061> 1729<7B> <7C> <2013> 1730endbfrange 173140 beginbfchar 1732<02> <0398> 1733<03> <039B> 1734<04> <039E> 1735<05> <03A0> 1736<06> <03A3> 1737<07> <03D2> 1738<08> <03A6> 1739<0B> <00660066> 1740<0C> <00660069> 1741<0D> <0066006C> 1742<0E> <006600660069> 1743<0F> <00660066006C> 1744<10> <0131> 1745<11> <0237> 1746<12> <0060> 1747<13> <00B4> 1748<14> <02C7> 1749<15> <02D8> 1750<16> <00AF> 1751<17> <02DA> 1752<18> <00B8> 1753<19> <00DF> 1754<1A> <00E6> 1755<1B> <0153> 1756<1C> <00F8> 1757<1D> <00C6> 1758<1E> <0152> 1759<1F> <00D8> 1760<21> <0021> 1761<22> <201D> 1762<27> <2019> 1763<3C> <00A1> 1764<3D> <003D> 1765<3E> <00BF> 1766<5C> <201C> 1767<5F> <02D9> 1768<60> <2018> 1769<7D> <02DD> 1770<7E> <007E> 1771<7F> <00A8> 1772endbfchar 1773endcmap 1774CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1775end 1776end 1777%%EndResource 1778%%EOF 1779 }\endgroup 1780 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 1781 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1782 }% 1783% 1784% \cmapOT1IT 1785 \begingroup 1786 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1787 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1788%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1789%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1790%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 1791%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 1792%%Version: 1.000 1793%%EndComments 1794/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 179512 dict begin 1796begincmap 1797/CIDSystemInfo 1798<< /Registry (TeX) 1799/Ordering (OT1IT) 1800/Supplement 0 1801>> def 1802/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 1803/CMapType 2 def 18041 begincodespacerange 1805<00> <7F> 1806endcodespacerange 18078 beginbfrange 1808<00> <01> <0393> 1809<09> <0A> <03A8> 1810<25> <26> <0025> 1811<28> <3B> <0028> 1812<3F> <5B> <003F> 1813<5D> <5E> <005D> 1814<61> <7A> <0061> 1815<7B> <7C> <2013> 1816endbfrange 181742 beginbfchar 1818<02> <0398> 1819<03> <039B> 1820<04> <039E> 1821<05> <03A0> 1822<06> <03A3> 1823<07> <03D2> 1824<08> <03A6> 1825<0B> <00660066> 1826<0C> <00660069> 1827<0D> <0066006C> 1828<0E> <006600660069> 1829<0F> <00660066006C> 1830<10> <0131> 1831<11> <0237> 1832<12> <0060> 1833<13> <00B4> 1834<14> <02C7> 1835<15> <02D8> 1836<16> <00AF> 1837<17> <02DA> 1838<18> <00B8> 1839<19> <00DF> 1840<1A> <00E6> 1841<1B> <0153> 1842<1C> <00F8> 1843<1D> <00C6> 1844<1E> <0152> 1845<1F> <00D8> 1846<21> <0021> 1847<22> <201D> 1848<23> <0023> 1849<24> <00A3> 1850<27> <2019> 1851<3C> <00A1> 1852<3D> <003D> 1853<3E> <00BF> 1854<5C> <201C> 1855<5F> <02D9> 1856<60> <2018> 1857<7D> <02DD> 1858<7E> <007E> 1859<7F> <00A8> 1860endbfchar 1861endcmap 1862CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1863end 1864end 1865%%EndResource 1866%%EOF 1867 }\endgroup 1868 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 1869 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1870 }% 1871% 1872% \cmapOT1TT 1873 \begingroup 1874 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1875 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1876%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1877%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1878%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 1879%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 1880%%Version: 1.000 1881%%EndComments 1882/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 188312 dict begin 1884begincmap 1885/CIDSystemInfo 1886<< /Registry (TeX) 1887/Ordering (OT1TT) 1888/Supplement 0 1889>> def 1890/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 1891/CMapType 2 def 18921 begincodespacerange 1893<00> <7F> 1894endcodespacerange 18955 beginbfrange 1896<00> <01> <0393> 1897<09> <0A> <03A8> 1898<21> <26> <0021> 1899<28> <5F> <0028> 1900<61> <7E> <0061> 1901endbfrange 190232 beginbfchar 1903<02> <0398> 1904<03> <039B> 1905<04> <039E> 1906<05> <03A0> 1907<06> <03A3> 1908<07> <03D2> 1909<08> <03A6> 1910<0B> <2191> 1911<0C> <2193> 1912<0D> <0027> 1913<0E> <00A1> 1914<0F> <00BF> 1915<10> <0131> 1916<11> <0237> 1917<12> <0060> 1918<13> <00B4> 1919<14> <02C7> 1920<15> <02D8> 1921<16> <00AF> 1922<17> <02DA> 1923<18> <00B8> 1924<19> <00DF> 1925<1A> <00E6> 1926<1B> <0153> 1927<1C> <00F8> 1928<1D> <00C6> 1929<1E> <0152> 1930<1F> <00D8> 1931<20> <2423> 1932<27> <2019> 1933<60> <2018> 1934<7F> <00A8> 1935endbfchar 1936endcmap 1937CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1938end 1939end 1940%%EndResource 1941%%EOF 1942 }\endgroup 1943 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 1944 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1945 }% 1946\fi\fi 1947 1948 1949% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the 1950% specified font prefix (normally `cm'). 1951% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 1952% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass 1953% empty to omit). 1954\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 1955 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 1956 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 1957} 1958% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 1959\let\cmap\gobble 1960% emacs-page end of cmaps 1961 1962% Use cm as the default font prefix. 1963% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 1964% before you read in texinfo.tex. 1965\ifx\fontprefix\undefined 1966\def\fontprefix{cm} 1967\fi 1968% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 1969\def\rmshape{r} 1970\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold 1971\def\bfshape{b} 1972\def\bxshape{bx} 1973\def\ttshape{tt} 1974\def\ttbshape{tt} 1975\def\ttslshape{sltt} 1976\def\itshape{ti} 1977\def\itbshape{bxti} 1978\def\slshape{sl} 1979\def\slbshape{bxsl} 1980\def\sfshape{ss} 1981\def\sfbshape{ss} 1982\def\scshape{csc} 1983\def\scbshape{csc} 1984 1985% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in 1986% Texinfo. 1987% 1988\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 1989% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 1990\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 1991\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 1992\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1993\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1994\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1995\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 1996\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1997\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1998\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1999\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2000\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2001\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2002\def\textecsize{1095} 2003 2004% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2005\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2006\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2007\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2008\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 2009 2010% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2011\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2012\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2013\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2014\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2015\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2016\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2017\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2018\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2019\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2020\font\smalli=cmmi9 2021\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2022\def\smallecsize{0900} 2023 2024% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2025\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2026\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2027\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2028\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2029\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2030\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2031\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2032\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2033\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2034\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2035\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2036\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2037 2038% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2039\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2040\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2041\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2042\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2043\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2044\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2045\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2046\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2047\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2048\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2049\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2050\def\titleecsize{2074} 2051 2052% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2053\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2054\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2055\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2056\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2057\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2058\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2059\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2060\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2061\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2062\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2063\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2064\def\chapecsize{1728} 2065 2066% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2067\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2068\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2069\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2070\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2071\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2072\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2073\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2074\let\secbf\secrm 2075\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2076\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2077\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2078\def\sececsize{1440} 2079 2080% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2081\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2082\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2083\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2084\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2085\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2086\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2087\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2088\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2089\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2090\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2091\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2092\def\ssececsize{1200} 2093 2094% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). 2095\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2096\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2097\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2098\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2099\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2100\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2101\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2102\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2103\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2104\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2105\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2106\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2107 2108% reset the current fonts 2109\textfonts 2110\rm 2111} % end of 11pt text font size definitions 2112 2113 2114% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2115% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2116% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2117% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2118% 2119\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2120% Text fonts (10pt). 2121\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2122\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2123\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2124\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2125\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2126\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2127\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2128\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2129\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2130\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2131\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2132\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2133\def\textecsize{1000} 2134 2135% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2136\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2137\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2138\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2139\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 2140 2141% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2142\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2143\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2144\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2145\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2146\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2147\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2148\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2149\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2150\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2151\font\smalli=cmmi9 2152\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2153\def\smallecsize{0900} 2154 2155% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2156\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2157\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2158\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2159\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2160\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2161\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2162\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2163\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2164\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2165\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2166\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2167\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2168 2169% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2170\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2171\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2172\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2173\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2174\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2175\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2176\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2177\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2178\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2179\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2180\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2181\def\titleecsize{2074} 2182 2183% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2184\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2185\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2186\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2187\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2188\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2189\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2190\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2191\let\chapbf\chaprm 2192\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2193\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2194\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2195\def\chapecsize{1440} 2196 2197% Section fonts (12pt). 2198\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2199\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2200\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2201\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2202\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2203\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2204\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2205\let\secbf\secrm 2206\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2207\font\seci=cmmi12 2208\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2209\def\sececsize{1200} 2210 2211% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2212\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2213\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2214\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2215\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2216\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2217\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2218\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2219\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2220\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2221\font\sseci=cmmi10 2222\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2223\def\ssececsize{1000} 2224 2225% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). 2226\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2227\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2228\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2229\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2230\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2231\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2232\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2233\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2234\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2235\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2236\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2237\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2238 2239% reduce space between paragraphs 2240\divide\parskip by 2 2241 2242% reset the current fonts 2243\textfonts 2244\rm 2245} % end of 10pt text font size definitions 2246 2247 2248% We provide the user-level command 2249% @fonttextsize 10 2250% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2251% 2252\def\xword{10} 2253\def\xiword{11} 2254% 2255\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2256 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2257 \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2258 % 2259 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2260 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2261 % 2262 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2263 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2264 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2265 \else 2266 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2267 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2268 \fi\fi 2269 \endgroup 2270} 2271 2272 2273% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2274% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since 2275% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except 2276% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and 2277% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). 2278% 2279\def\resetmathfonts{% 2280 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy 2281 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf 2282 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf 2283} 2284 2285% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead 2286% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the 2287% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire 2288% \tenSTYLE to set the current font. 2289% 2290% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2291% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in 2292% the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2293% 2294% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2295% 2296\def\textfonts{% 2297 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl 2298 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc 2299 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy 2300 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl 2301 \def\curfontsize{text}% 2302 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2303 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} 2304\def\titlefonts{% 2305 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl 2306 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc 2307 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy 2308 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl 2309 \def\curfontsize{title}% 2310 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% 2311 \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} 2312\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}} 2313\def\chapfonts{% 2314 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl 2315 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc 2316 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy 2317 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl 2318 \def\curfontsize{chap}% 2319 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% 2320 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} 2321\def\secfonts{% 2322 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl 2323 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc 2324 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy 2325 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl 2326 \def\curfontsize{sec}% 2327 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% 2328 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} 2329\def\subsecfonts{% 2330 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl 2331 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc 2332 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy 2333 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl 2334 \def\curfontsize{ssec}% 2335 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% 2336 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} 2337\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts 2338\def\reducedfonts{% 2339 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl 2340 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc 2341 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy 2342 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl 2343 \def\curfontsize{reduced}% 2344 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2345 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2346\def\smallfonts{% 2347 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl 2348 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc 2349 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy 2350 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl 2351 \def\curfontsize{small}% 2352 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2353 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2354\def\smallerfonts{% 2355 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl 2356 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc 2357 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy 2358 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl 2359 \def\curfontsize{smaller}% 2360 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2361 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} 2362 2363% Fonts for short table of contents. 2364\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2365\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2366\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2367\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2368 2369% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2370\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2371\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2372 2373% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2374\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2375 2376% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2377% can fit this many characters: 2378% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2379% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2380% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2381% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2382% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2383% 2384% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2385% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2386% --karl, 24jan03. 2387 2388% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2389% 2390\definetextfontsizexi 2391 2392 2393\message{markup,} 2394 2395% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2396% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2397% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2398% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2399% 2400\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2401 2402% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will 2403% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. 2404% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost 2405% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles 2406% currently in effect. 2407\newif\ifmarkupvar 2408\newif\ifmarkupsamp 2409\newif\ifmarkupkey 2410%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp. 2411%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp. 2412\newif\ifmarkupcode 2413\newif\ifmarkupkbd 2414%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code. 2415%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code. 2416\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now). 2417\newif\ifmarkupexample 2418\newif\ifmarkupverb 2419\newif\ifmarkupverbatim 2420 2421\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty 2422 2423\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% 2424 \csname markup#1true\endcsname 2425 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% 2426 \markupstylesetup 2427} 2428 2429\let\markupstylesetup\empty 2430 2431\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% 2432 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup 2433 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% 2434 \def#1% 2435} 2436 2437% Markup style setup for left and right quotes. 2438\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% 2439 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2440 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi 2441} 2442 2443\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% 2444 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2445 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi 2446} 2447 2448{ 2449\catcode`\'=\active 2450\catcode`\`=\active 2451 2452\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} 2453\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} 2454 2455\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} 2456\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} 2457 2458\gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft} 2459} 2460 2461\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft 2462\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright 2463\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft 2464\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright 2465\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft 2466\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright 2467\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft 2468\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright 2469 2470\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft 2471\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft 2472 2473% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right 2474% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote 2475% from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it 2476% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least 2477% evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the 2478% regular 0x27. 2479% 2480\def\codequoteright{% 2481 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2482 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2483 '% 2484 \else \char'15 \fi 2485 \else \char'15 \fi 2486} 2487% 2488% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 2489% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 2490% the code environments to do likewise. 2491% 2492\def\codequoteleft{% 2493 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2494 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2495 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 2496 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2497 \relax`% 2498 \else \char'22 \fi 2499 \else \char'22 \fi 2500} 2501 2502% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2503\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} 2504 2505% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2506\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2507 2508%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans 2509%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic 2510 2511% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction 2512% unless the following character is such as not to need one. 2513\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else 2514 \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} 2515\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2516\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2517 2518% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. 2519% @var is set to this for defun arguments. 2520\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2521 2522% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2523% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2524\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2525 2526\let\i=\smartitalic 2527\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2528\def\var#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\smartslanted{#1}}} 2529\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2530\let\emph=\smartitalic 2531 2532% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2533\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2534\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2535\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2536 2537% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. 2538\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2539\let\strong=\b 2540 2541% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2542\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2543 2544% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2545% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2546% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2547% 2548\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2549\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2550 2551% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2552% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2553% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2554% 2555\catcode`@=11 2556 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2557 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m 2558 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m 2559 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2560 } 2561 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2562 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2563 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2564 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2565 } 2566\catcode`@=\other 2567\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2568 2569% @t, explicit typewriter. 2570\def\t#1{% 2571 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2572 \null 2573} 2574 2575% @samp. 2576\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} 2577 2578% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. 2579%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2580%\font\keysy=cmsy9 2581%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 2582% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 2583% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 2584% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 2585% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 2586% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 2587 2588% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already 2589% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But 2590% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. 2591% 2592\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% 2593 \nohyphenation 2594 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi 2595 #1}\null} 2596 2597% ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command. 2598\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} 2599 2600% @file, @option are the same as @samp. 2601\let\file=\samp 2602\let\option=\samp 2603 2604% @code is a modification of @t, 2605% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. 2606\def\tclose#1{% 2607 {% 2608 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2609 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2610 % 2611 % Switch to typewriter. 2612 \tt 2613 % 2614 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2615 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2616 % 2617 % Turn off hyphenation. 2618 \nohyphenation 2619 % 2620 \rawbackslash 2621 \plainfrenchspacing 2622 #1% 2623 }% 2624 \null 2625} 2626 2627% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2628% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2629% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2630 2631% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2632% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2633% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2634% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. 2635% -- rms. 2636{ 2637 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2638 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2639 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions 2640 % 2641 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2642 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 2643 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. 2644 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2645 \ifallowcodebreaks 2646 \let-\codedash 2647 \let_\codeunder 2648 \else 2649 \let-\realdash 2650 \let_\realunder 2651 \fi 2652 \codex 2653 } 2654} 2655 2656\def\realdash{-} 2657\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} 2658\def\codeunder{% 2659 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2660 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2661 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2662 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2663 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2664 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2665 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2666 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2667 {\_}% 2668} 2669\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2670 2671% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2672% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in 2673% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in 2674% general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this. 2675% 2676\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2677 2678\def\keywordtrue{true} 2679\def\keywordfalse{false} 2680 2681\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2682 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2683 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2684 \allowcodebreakstrue 2685 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2686 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2687 \else 2688 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2689 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}% 2690 \fi\fi 2691} 2692 2693% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 2694% then @kbd has no effect. 2695\def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}} 2696 2697% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 2698% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 2699% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 2700\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 2701 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2702 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 2703 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 2704 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 2705 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2706 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 2707 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2708 \else 2709 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2710 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}% 2711 \fi\fi\fi 2712} 2713\def\worddistinct{distinct} 2714\def\wordexample{example} 2715\def\wordcode{code} 2716 2717% Default is `distinct'. 2718\kbdinputstyle distinct 2719 2720\def\xkey{\key} 2721\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 2722\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 2723\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 2724\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi} 2725 2726% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. 2727\let\indicateurl=\code 2728\let\env=\code 2729\let\command=\code 2730 2731% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 2732\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 2733 2734% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 2735\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 2736\def\click{\arrow} 2737 2738% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) 2739% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third 2740% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url 2741% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in 2742% a hypertex \special here. 2743% 2744\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} 2745\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup 2746 \unsepspaces 2747 \pdfurl{#1}% 2748 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2749 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2750 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2751 \else 2752 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2753 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2754 \ifpdf 2755 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it 2756 \else 2757 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url 2758 \fi 2759 \else 2760 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it 2761 \fi 2762 \fi 2763 \endlink 2764\endgroup} 2765 2766% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 2767% 2768\let\url=\uref 2769 2770% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 2771% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 2772% 2773%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 2774\ifpdf 2775 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 2776 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 2777 \unsepspaces 2778 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 2779 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2780 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 2781 \endlink 2782 \endgroup} 2783\else 2784 \let\email=\uref 2785\fi 2786 2787% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 2788% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 2789% 2790\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 2791 2792% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', 2793% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for 2794% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. 2795%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} 2796 2797% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 2798% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 2799% all-uppercase. 2800% 2801\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 2802\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2803 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% 2804 \def\temp{#2}% 2805 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2806 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2807 \fi 2808} 2809 2810% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 2811% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 2812% 2813\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 2814\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2815 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2816 \def\temp{#2}% 2817 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2818 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2819 \fi 2820} 2821 2822 2823\message{glyphs,} 2824 2825% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 2826% 2827% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 2828% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 2829% 2830\def\point{$\star$} 2831\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 2832\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 2833\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 2834\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 2835\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 2836 2837% The @error{} command. 2838% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 2839% 2840\newbox\errorbox 2841% 2842{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 2843\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 2844% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 2845\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt} 2846% 2847\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 2848 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 2849 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 2850 \vbox{% 2851 \hrule height\dimen2 2852 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 2853 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 2854 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 2855 \hrule height\dimen2} 2856 \hfil} 2857% 2858\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 2859 2860% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 2861% 2862\def\pounds{{\it\$}} 2863 2864% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 2865% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 2866% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 2867% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 2868% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 2869% 2870% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 2871% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 2872% font height. 2873% 2874% feymr - regular 2875% feymo - slanted 2876% feybr - bold 2877% feybo - bold slanted 2878% 2879% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 2880% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 2881% Hmm. 2882% 2883% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 2884% Hope not. 2885% 2886% 2887\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 2888\def\eurofont{% 2889 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 2890 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 2891 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 2892 % font installed. 2893 % 2894 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 2895 % that to the current nominal size. 2896 % 2897 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 2898 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 2899 % 2900 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 2901 % 2902 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 2903 % bold: 2904 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 2905 \else 2906 % regular: 2907 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 2908 \fi 2909 \thiseurofont 2910} 2911 2912% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because 2913% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect 2914% the redefinition. 2915% 2916% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. 2917\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth 2918\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth 2919\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn 2920\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn 2921% 2922\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 2923\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 2924\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 2925\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 2926\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 2927\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 2928\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 2929\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 2930% 2931% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but 2932% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the 2933% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer 2934% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. 2935% 2936% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using 2937% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in 2938% the same EC font. 2939\def\ogonek#1{{% 2940 \def\temp{#1}% 2941 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek 2942 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek 2943 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek 2944 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek 2945 \else 2946 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% 2947 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% 2948 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% 2949 \fi 2950 \fi\fi\fi\fi 2951 }% 2952} 2953\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} 2954\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} 2955\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} 2956\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} 2957% 2958% Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs. 2959\def\ecfont{% 2960 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this 2961 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 2962 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 2963 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 2964 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 2965 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 2966 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 2967 % bold: 2968 \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 2969 \else 2970 % regular: 2971 \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 2972 \fi 2973 \thisecfont 2974} 2975 2976% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 2977% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 2978% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 2979% 2980\def\registeredsymbol{% 2981 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% 2982 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 2983 }$% 2984} 2985 2986% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 2987% 2988\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 2989 2990% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 2991% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 2992% so we'll define it if necessary. 2993% 2994\ifx\Orb\undefined 2995\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 2996\fi 2997 2998% Quotes. 2999\chardef\quotedblleft="5C 3000\chardef\quotedblright=`\" 3001\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 3002\chardef\quoteright=`\' 3003 3004 3005\message{page headings,} 3006 3007\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 3008\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 3009 3010% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 3011\newif\ifseenauthor 3012\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 3013 3014% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the 3015% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. 3016% 3017\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 3018 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 3019\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 3020 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 3021 3022\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 3023 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 3024 3025\envdef\titlepage{% 3026 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 3027 \begingroup 3028 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 3029 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 3030 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 3031 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 3032 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3033 % 3034 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 3035 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 3036 \let\oldpage = \page 3037 \def\page{% 3038 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3039 \finishtitlepage 3040 \fi 3041 \let\page = \oldpage 3042 \page 3043 \null 3044 }% 3045} 3046 3047\def\Etitlepage{% 3048 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3049 \finishtitlepage 3050 \fi 3051 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 3052 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 3053 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 3054 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 3055 \oldpage 3056 \endgroup 3057 % 3058 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 3059 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 3060 \HEADINGSon 3061 % 3062 % If they want short, they certainly want long too. 3063 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 3064 \shortcontents 3065 \contents 3066 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 3067 \global\let\contents = \relax 3068 \fi 3069 % 3070 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 3071 \contents 3072 \global\let\contents = \relax 3073 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 3074 \fi 3075} 3076 3077\def\finishtitlepage{% 3078 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 3079 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 3080 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3081} 3082 3083%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 3084 3085\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm 3086\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 3087 3088\parseargdef\title{% 3089 \checkenv\titlepage 3090 \leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1} 3091 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 3092 \finishedtitlepagefalse 3093 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 3094} 3095 3096\parseargdef\subtitle{% 3097 \checkenv\titlepage 3098 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 3099} 3100 3101% @author should come last, but may come many times. 3102% It can also be used inside @quotation. 3103% 3104\parseargdef\author{% 3105 \def\temp{\quotation}% 3106 \ifx\thisenv\temp 3107 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 3108 \else 3109 \checkenv\titlepage 3110 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 3111 {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}% 3112 \fi 3113} 3114 3115 3116%%% Set up page headings and footings. 3117 3118\let\thispage=\folio 3119 3120\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 3121\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 3122\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 3123\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 3124 3125% Now make TeX use those variables 3126\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 3127 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 3128\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 3129 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 3130\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 3131 3132% Commands to set those variables. 3133% For example, this is what @headings on does 3134% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 3135% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 3136% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 3137% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 3138 3139 3140\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 3141\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3142\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3143\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3144 3145\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 3146\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3147\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3148\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3149 3150\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 3151 3152\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 3153\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3154\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3155\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3156 3157\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 3158\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3159\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3160 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3161 % 3162 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 3163 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 3164 \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt 3165 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 3166} 3167 3168\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 3169 3170% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 3171% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 3172% 3173% The same set of arguments for: 3174% 3175% @oddheadingmarks 3176% @evenfootingmarks 3177% @oddfootingmarks 3178% @everyheadingmarks 3179% @everyfootingmarks 3180 3181\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 3182\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 3183\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 3184\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 3185\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 3186 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 3187\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 3188 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 3189% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 3190\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 3191 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 3192 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 3193} 3194 3195\everyheadingmarks bottom 3196\everyfootingmarks bottom 3197 3198% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 3199% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 3200% @headings off turns them off. 3201% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 3202% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3203% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3204% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3205% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3206% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3207 3208\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3209 3210\def\HEADINGSoff{% 3211\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3212\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} 3213\HEADINGSoff 3214% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3215% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3216% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3217% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3218% edge of all pages. 3219\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3220\global\pageno=1 3221\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3222\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3223\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3224\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3225\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3226} 3227\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3228 3229% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3230% page number on top right. 3231\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3232\global\pageno=1 3233\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3234\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3235\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3236\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3237\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3238} 3239\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3240 3241\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3242\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3243\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3244\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3245\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3246\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3247\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3248\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3249} 3250 3251\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3252\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3253\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3254\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3255\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3256\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3257\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3258} 3259 3260% Subroutines used in generating headings 3261% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3262% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 3263% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 3264\ifx\today\undefined 3265\def\today{% 3266 \number\day\space 3267 \ifcase\month 3268 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 3269 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 3270 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 3271 \fi 3272 \space\number\year} 3273\fi 3274 3275% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 3276% It generates no output of its own. 3277\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 3278\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 3279 3280 3281\message{tables,} 3282% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 3283 3284% default indentation of table text 3285\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 3286% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 3287\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 3288% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 3289\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 3290 3291% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 3292\newdimen\itemmax 3293 3294% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 3295% these defs. 3296% They also define \itemindex 3297% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 3298 3299\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 3300 3301\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 3302 3303\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 3304\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 3305 3306\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 3307 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 3308 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 3309 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 3310 \itemindex{#1}% 3311 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 3312 % 3313 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 3314 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 3315 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 3316 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 3317 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 3318 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 3319 % 3320 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 3321 % but leave it ragged-right. 3322 \begingroup 3323 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 3324 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 3325 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil 3326 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 3327 \endgroup 3328 % 3329 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 3330 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 3331 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 3332 % 3333 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 3334 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 3335 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 3336 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 3337 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 3338 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 3339 % 3340 \penalty 10001 3341 \endgroup 3342 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 3343 \else 3344 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 3345 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 3346 \noindent 3347 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 3348 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 3349 % eventually be printed. 3350 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 3351 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 3352 \unhbox0 3353 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 3354 \endgroup 3355 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 3356 \fi 3357} 3358 3359\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 3360\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 3361 3362% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 3363\envdef\table{% 3364 \let\itemindex\gobble 3365 \tablecheck{table}% 3366} 3367\envdef\ftable{% 3368 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 3369 \tablecheck{ftable}% 3370} 3371\envdef\vtable{% 3372 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 3373 \tablecheck{vtable}% 3374} 3375\def\tablecheck#1{% 3376 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 3377 \endgroup 3378 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 3379 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 3380 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 3381 \else 3382 \let\next\tablex 3383 \fi 3384 \next 3385} 3386\def\tablex#1{% 3387 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 3388 \parsearg\tabley 3389} 3390\def\tabley#1{% 3391 {% 3392 \makevalueexpandable 3393 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 3394 \expandafter 3395 }\temp \endtablez 3396} 3397\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 3398 \aboveenvbreak 3399 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 3400 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 3401 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 3402 \itemmax=\tableindent 3403 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 3404 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 3405 \exdentamount=\tableindent 3406 \parindent = 0pt 3407 \parskip = \smallskipamount 3408 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3409 \let\item = \internalBitem 3410 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 3411} 3412\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 3413\let\Eftable\Etable 3414\let\Evtable\Etable 3415\let\Eitemize\Etable 3416\let\Eenumerate\Etable 3417 3418% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 3419 3420\newcount \itemno 3421 3422\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 3423 3424\def\doitemize#1{% 3425 \aboveenvbreak 3426 \itemmax=\itemindent 3427 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 3428 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 3429 \exdentamount=\itemindent 3430 \parindent=0pt 3431 \parskip=\smallskipamount 3432 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3433 % 3434 % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says 3435 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error 3436 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the 3437 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if 3438 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. 3439 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 3440 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% 3441 % 3442 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 3443 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 3444 % 3445 \let\item=\itemizeitem 3446} 3447 3448% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 3449% 3450\def\itemizeitem{% 3451 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 3452 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 3453 {% 3454 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 3455 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 3456 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 3457 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 3458 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 3459 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 3460 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 3461 % that's the theory. 3462 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 3463 \noindent 3464 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 3465 % 3466 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. 3467 \flushcr 3468} 3469 3470% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 3471% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 3472% 3473\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 3474 3475% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 3476% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 3477% argument is the same as `1'. 3478% 3479\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 3480\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 3481 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 3482 \def\thearg{#1}% 3483 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 3484 % 3485 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 3486 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 3487 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 3488 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 3489 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 3490 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 3491 \ifx\rest\empty 3492 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 3493 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 3494 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 3495 % not equal to itself. 3496 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 3497 % 3498 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 3499 % continuing to look for a <number>. 3500 % 3501 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 3502 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 3503 \else 3504 % It's a letter. 3505 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 3506 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 3507 \else 3508 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 3509 \fi 3510 \fi 3511 \else 3512 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 3513 \numericenumerate 3514 \fi 3515} 3516 3517% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 3518% given in \thearg. 3519% 3520\def\numericenumerate{% 3521 \itemno = \thearg 3522 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 3523} 3524 3525% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 3526\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 3527 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3528 \startenumeration{% 3529 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3530 \ifnum\itemno=0 3531 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3532 alphabet}% 3533 \fi 3534 \char\lccode\itemno 3535 }% 3536} 3537 3538% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 3539\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 3540 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3541 \startenumeration{% 3542 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3543 \ifnum\itemno=0 3544 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3545 alphabet} 3546 \fi 3547 \char\uccode\itemno 3548 }% 3549} 3550 3551% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 3552% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 3553% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 3554% 3555\def\startenumeration#1{% 3556 \advance\itemno by -1 3557 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 3558} 3559 3560% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 3561% to @enumerate. 3562% 3563\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 3564\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 3565\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3566\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3567 3568 3569% @multitable macros 3570% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 3571% 3572% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 3573% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 3574% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 3575% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 3576 3577% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 3578 3579% To make preamble: 3580% 3581% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 3582% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 3583% @item ... 3584% 3585% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 3586% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 3587% columns as desired. 3588 3589 3590% Or use a template: 3591% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3592% @item ... 3593% using the widest term desired in each column. 3594 3595% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 3596% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 3597% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 3598% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 3599 3600% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 3601% if they are. 3602 3603% Sample multitable: 3604 3605% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3606% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 3607% @item 3608% first col stuff 3609% @tab 3610% second col stuff 3611% @tab 3612% third col 3613% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 3614% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 3615% 3616% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 3617% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 3618% @end multitable 3619 3620% Default dimensions may be reset by user. 3621% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 3622% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 3623% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 3624% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 3625% to baseline. 3626% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 3627% 3628\newskip\multitableparskip 3629\newskip\multitableparindent 3630\newdimen\multitablecolspace 3631\newskip\multitablelinespace 3632\multitableparskip=0pt 3633\multitableparindent=6pt 3634\multitablecolspace=12pt 3635\multitablelinespace=0pt 3636 3637% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 3638% 3639\let\endsetuptable\relax 3640\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 3641\let\columnfractions\relax 3642\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 3643\newif\ifsetpercent 3644 3645% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 3646% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 3647% 3648\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 3649 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3650 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 3651 \setuptable 3652} 3653 3654\newcount\colcount 3655\def\setuptable#1{% 3656 \def\firstarg{#1}% 3657 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 3658 \let\go = \relax 3659 \else 3660 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 3661 \global\setpercenttrue 3662 \else 3663 \ifsetpercent 3664 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 3665 \else 3666 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3667 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 3668 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 3669 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 3670 \fi 3671 \fi 3672 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 3673 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 3674 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 3675 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 3676 \else 3677 \let\go = \setuptable 3678 \fi% 3679 \fi 3680 \go 3681} 3682 3683% multitable-only commands. 3684% 3685% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. 3686% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group 3687% of an alignment entry. \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to 3688% undo it ourselves. 3689\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable 3690\def\headitem{% 3691 \checkenv\multitable 3692 \crcr 3693 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs 3694 \the\everytab % for the first item 3695}% 3696% 3697% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 3698% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 3699% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. 3700% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. 3701\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 3702 3703% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 3704% 3705\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 3706% 3707\envdef\multitable{% 3708 \vskip\parskip 3709 \startsavinginserts 3710 % 3711 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 3712 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 3713 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 3714 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 3715 \def\item{\crcr}% 3716 % 3717 \tolerance=9500 3718 \hbadness=9500 3719 \setmultitablespacing 3720 \parskip=\multitableparskip 3721 \parindent=\multitableparindent 3722 \overfullrule=0pt 3723 \global\colcount=0 3724 % 3725 \everycr = {% 3726 \noalign{% 3727 \global\everytab={}% 3728 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 3729 % Check for saved footnotes, etc. 3730 \checkinserts 3731 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. 3732 %\filbreak 3733 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the 3734 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the 3735 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. 3736 }% 3737 }% 3738 % 3739 \parsearg\domultitable 3740} 3741\def\domultitable#1{% 3742 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 3743 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 3744 % 3745 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 3746 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 3747 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 3748 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 3749 \halign\bgroup &% 3750 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3751 \multistrut 3752 \vtop{% 3753 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 3754 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 3755 % 3756 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 3757 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 3758 % the first one. 3759 % 3760 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 3761 % to the width of each template entry. 3762 % 3763 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 3764 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 3765 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 3766 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 3767 % 3768 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 3769 \rightskip=0pt 3770 \ifnum\colcount=1 3771 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 3772 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 3773 \else 3774 \ifsetpercent \else 3775 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 3776 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 3777 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 3778 \fi 3779 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 3780 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 3781 \fi 3782 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 3783 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 3784 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 3785 % For example: 3786 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 3787 % @item @code{#} 3788 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 3789 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 3790 % marking characters. 3791 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 3792 }\cr 3793} 3794\def\Emultitable{% 3795 \crcr 3796 \egroup % end the \halign 3797 \global\setpercentfalse 3798} 3799 3800\def\setmultitablespacing{% 3801 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 3802 % 3803 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 3804 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 3805 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 3806 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 3807\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 3808\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 3809\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 3810\fi 3811%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 3812%% table. If not, do nothing. 3813%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 3814\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 3815\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 3816\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller 3817 %% than skip between lines in the table. 3818\fi% 3819\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 3820\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 3821\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller 3822 %% than skip between lines in the table. 3823\fi} 3824 3825 3826\message{conditionals,} 3827 3828% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 3829% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 3830% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 3831% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 3832% attempt to close an environment group. 3833% 3834\def\makecond#1{% 3835 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 3836 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 3837} 3838\makecond{iftex} 3839\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 3840\makecond{ifnothtml} 3841\makecond{ifnotinfo} 3842\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 3843\makecond{ifnotxml} 3844 3845% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 3846% 3847\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 3848\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 3849\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 3850\def\html{\doignore{html}} 3851\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 3852\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 3853\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 3854\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 3855\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 3856\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 3857\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 3858\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 3859\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 3860 3861% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 3862% 3863% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 3864\newcount\doignorecount 3865 3866\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 3867 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 3868 \obeylines 3869 \catcode`\@ = \other 3870 \catcode`\{ = \other 3871 \catcode`\} = \other 3872 % 3873 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 3874 \spaceisspace 3875 % 3876 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 3877 \doignorecount = 0 3878 % 3879 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 3880 \dodoignore{#1}% 3881} 3882 3883{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 3884 \obeylines % 3885 % 3886 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 3887 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 3888 % 3889 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 3890 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 3891 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 3892 % 3893 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 3894 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 3895 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 3896 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 3897 % 3898 % And now expand that command. 3899 \doignoretext ^^M% 3900 }% 3901} 3902 3903\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 3904 \def\temp{#1}% 3905 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 3906 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 3907 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 3908 \advance\doignorecount by 1 3909 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 3910 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 3911 \fi 3912 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 3913} 3914 3915% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 3916% 3917\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 3918 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 3919 \let\next\enddoignore 3920 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 3921 \advance\doignorecount by -1 3922 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 3923 \fi 3924 \next 3925} 3926 3927% Finish off ignored text. 3928{ \obeylines% 3929 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 3930 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 3931 % would result in a blank line in the output. 3932 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 3933} 3934 3935 3936% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 3937% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 3938% 3939% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 3940% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 3941% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 3942% didn't need it. 3943% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 3944% 3945\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 3946\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 3947 {% 3948 \makevalueexpandable 3949 \def\temp{#2}% 3950 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 3951 \ifx\temp\empty 3952 \next{}% 3953 \else 3954 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 3955 \fi 3956 }% 3957} 3958% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 3959\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 3960 3961% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 3962% 3963\parseargdef\clear{% 3964 {% 3965 \makevalueexpandable 3966 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 3967 }% 3968} 3969 3970% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 3971\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 3972\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 3973{ 3974 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active 3975 % 3976 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 3977 \let\value = \expandablevalue 3978 % We don't want these characters active, ... 3979 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 3980 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 3981 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 3982 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 3983 \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore 3984 } 3985} 3986 3987% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's 3988% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). 3989% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since 3990% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the 3991% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain 3992% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work 3993% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). 3994% 3995\def\expandablevalue#1{% 3996 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 3997 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 3998 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 3999 \else 4000 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4001 \fi 4002} 4003 4004% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 4005% with @set. 4006% 4007% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. 4008% 4009\makecond{ifset} 4010\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 4011\def\doifset#1#2{% 4012 {% 4013 \makevalueexpandable 4014 \let\next=\empty 4015 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 4016 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 4017 \fi 4018 \expandafter 4019 }\next 4020} 4021\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 4022 4023% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been 4024% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 4025% 4026% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 4027% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 4028% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 4029% 4030\makecond{ifclear} 4031\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 4032\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 4033 4034% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 4035% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 4036\let\dircategory=\comment 4037 4038% @defininfoenclose. 4039\let\definfoenclose=\comment 4040 4041 4042\message{indexing,} 4043% Index generation facilities 4044 4045% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 4046% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 4047\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 4048 4049% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. 4050% It automatically defines \fooindex such that 4051% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. 4052% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for 4053% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. 4054% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 4055% for the sake of vms. 4056% 4057\def\newindex#1{% 4058 \iflinks 4059 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 4060 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file 4061 \fi 4062 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 4063 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 4064} 4065 4066% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 4067% 4068\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 4069 4070% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 4071% 4072\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 4073% 4074\def\newcodeindex#1{% 4075 \iflinks 4076 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 4077 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 4078 \fi 4079 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 4080 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 4081} 4082 4083 4084% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 4085% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 4086% 4087% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 4088% inside @code. 4089% 4090\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 4091\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 4092 4093% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 4094% #3 the target index (bar). 4095\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 4096 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up 4097 % closing the target index. 4098 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax 4099 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the 4100 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. 4101 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname 4102 \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 4103 \fi 4104 % redefine \fooindfile: 4105 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 4106 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 4107 % redefine \fooindex: 4108 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 4109} 4110 4111% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. 4112% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 4113% and it is "foo", the name of the index. 4114 4115% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. 4116% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. 4117 4118% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 4119% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. 4120 4121\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} 4122\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 4123 4124% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 4125\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} 4126\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 4127 4128% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. 4129% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, 4130% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. 4131% 4132\def\indexdummies{% 4133 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. 4134 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. 4135 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% 4136 % 4137 % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. 4138 % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes 4139 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. 4140 \let\{ = \mylbrace 4141 \let\} = \myrbrace 4142 % 4143 % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is 4144 % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts 4145 % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, 4146 % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput 4147 % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput 4148 % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that 4149 % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it 4150 % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that 4151 % is still getting written without apparent harm. 4152 % 4153 % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to 4154 % help-texinfo, 22may06): 4155 % @macro funindex {WORD} 4156 % @findex xyz 4157 % @end macro 4158 % ... 4159 % @funindex commtest 4160 % 4161 % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. 4162 % 4163 % Sample whatsit resulting: 4164 % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} 4165 % 4166 % So: 4167 \let\endinput = \empty 4168 % 4169 % Do the redefinitions. 4170 \commondummies 4171} 4172 4173% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to 4174% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of 4175% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, 4176% this will be simpler. 4177% 4178\def\atdummies{% 4179 \def\@{@@}% 4180 \def\ {@ }% 4181 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd 4182 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd 4183 % 4184 % Do the redefinitions. 4185 \commondummies 4186 \otherbackslash 4187} 4188 4189% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. 4190% 4191\def\commondummies{% 4192 % 4193 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 4194 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words, 4195 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 4196 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 4197 % from whatever follows. 4198 % 4199 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 4200 % space. 4201 % 4202 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 4203 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 4204 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 4205 % 4206 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% 4207 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% 4208 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 4209 % 4210 \commondummiesnofonts 4211 % 4212 \definedummyletter\_% 4213 % 4214 % Non-English letters. 4215 \definedummyword\AA 4216 \definedummyword\AE 4217 \definedummyword\DH 4218 \definedummyword\L 4219 \definedummyword\O 4220 \definedummyword\OE 4221 \definedummyword\TH 4222 \definedummyword\aa 4223 \definedummyword\ae 4224 \definedummyword\dh 4225 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4226 \definedummyword\l 4227 \definedummyword\o 4228 \definedummyword\oe 4229 \definedummyword\ordf 4230 \definedummyword\ordm 4231 \definedummyword\questiondown 4232 \definedummyword\ss 4233 \definedummyword\th 4234 % 4235 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4236 \definedummyword\bf 4237 \definedummyword\gtr 4238 \definedummyword\hat 4239 \definedummyword\less 4240 \definedummyword\sf 4241 \definedummyword\sl 4242 \definedummyword\tclose 4243 \definedummyword\tt 4244 % 4245 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4246 \definedummyword\TeX 4247 % 4248 % Assorted special characters. 4249 \definedummyword\bullet 4250 \definedummyword\comma 4251 \definedummyword\copyright 4252 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4253 \definedummyword\dots 4254 \definedummyword\enddots 4255 \definedummyword\equiv 4256 \definedummyword\error 4257 \definedummyword\euro 4258 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4259 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4260 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4261 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4262 \definedummyword\expansion 4263 \definedummyword\minus 4264 \definedummyword\ogonek 4265 \definedummyword\pounds 4266 \definedummyword\point 4267 \definedummyword\print 4268 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4269 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4270 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4271 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4272 \definedummyword\quoteright 4273 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4274 \definedummyword\result 4275 \definedummyword\textdegree 4276 % 4277 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4278 \macrolist 4279 % 4280 \normalturnoffactive 4281 % 4282 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any 4283 % (non-fully-expandable) commands. 4284 \makevalueexpandable 4285} 4286 4287% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. 4288% 4289\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 4290 % Control letters and accents. 4291 \definedummyletter\!% 4292 \definedummyaccent\"% 4293 \definedummyaccent\'% 4294 \definedummyletter\*% 4295 \definedummyaccent\,% 4296 \definedummyletter\.% 4297 \definedummyletter\/% 4298 \definedummyletter\:% 4299 \definedummyaccent\=% 4300 \definedummyletter\?% 4301 \definedummyaccent\^% 4302 \definedummyaccent\`% 4303 \definedummyaccent\~% 4304 \definedummyword\u 4305 \definedummyword\v 4306 \definedummyword\H 4307 \definedummyword\dotaccent 4308 \definedummyword\ogonek 4309 \definedummyword\ringaccent 4310 \definedummyword\tieaccent 4311 \definedummyword\ubaraccent 4312 \definedummyword\udotaccent 4313 \definedummyword\dotless 4314 % 4315 % Texinfo font commands. 4316 \definedummyword\b 4317 \definedummyword\i 4318 \definedummyword\r 4319 \definedummyword\sc 4320 \definedummyword\t 4321 % 4322 % Commands that take arguments. 4323 \definedummyword\acronym 4324 \definedummyword\cite 4325 \definedummyword\code 4326 \definedummyword\command 4327 \definedummyword\dfn 4328 \definedummyword\email 4329 \definedummyword\emph 4330 \definedummyword\env 4331 \definedummyword\file 4332 \definedummyword\kbd 4333 \definedummyword\key 4334 \definedummyword\math 4335 \definedummyword\option 4336 \definedummyword\pxref 4337 \definedummyword\ref 4338 \definedummyword\samp 4339 \definedummyword\strong 4340 \definedummyword\tie 4341 \definedummyword\uref 4342 \definedummyword\url 4343 \definedummyword\var 4344 \definedummyword\verb 4345 \definedummyword\w 4346 \definedummyword\xref 4347} 4348 4349% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 4350% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 4351% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 4352% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 4353% 4354\def\indexnofonts{% 4355 % Accent commands should become @asis. 4356 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 4357 % We can just ignore other control letters. 4358 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 4359 % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. 4360 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent 4361 % 4362 \commondummiesnofonts 4363 % 4364 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 4365 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 4366 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 4367 %\let\tt=\asis 4368 % 4369 \def\ { }% 4370 \def\@{@}% 4371 % how to handle braces? 4372 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 4373 % 4374 % Non-English letters. 4375 \def\AA{AA}% 4376 \def\AE{AE}% 4377 \def\DH{DZZ}% 4378 \def\L{L}% 4379 \def\OE{OE}% 4380 \def\O{O}% 4381 \def\TH{ZZZ}% 4382 \def\aa{aa}% 4383 \def\ae{ae}% 4384 \def\dh{dzz}% 4385 \def\exclamdown{!}% 4386 \def\l{l}% 4387 \def\oe{oe}% 4388 \def\ordf{a}% 4389 \def\ordm{o}% 4390 \def\o{o}% 4391 \def\questiondown{?}% 4392 \def\ss{ss}% 4393 \def\th{zzz}% 4394 % 4395 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 4396 \def\TeX{TeX}% 4397 % 4398 % Assorted special characters. 4399 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) 4400 \def\bullet{bullet}% 4401 \def\comma{,}% 4402 \def\copyright{copyright}% 4403 \def\dots{...}% 4404 \def\enddots{...}% 4405 \def\equiv{==}% 4406 \def\error{error}% 4407 \def\euro{euro}% 4408 \def\expansion{==>}% 4409 \def\guillemetleft{<<}% 4410 \def\guillemetright{>>}% 4411 \def\guilsinglleft{<}% 4412 \def\guilsinglright{>}% 4413 \def\minus{-}% 4414 \def\point{.}% 4415 \def\pounds{pounds}% 4416 \def\print{-|}% 4417 \def\quotedblbase{"}% 4418 \def\quotedblleft{"}% 4419 \def\quotedblright{"}% 4420 \def\quoteleft{`}% 4421 \def\quoteright{'}% 4422 \def\quotesinglbase{,}% 4423 \def\registeredsymbol{R}% 4424 \def\result{=>}% 4425 \def\textdegree{o}% 4426 % 4427 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 4428 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 4429 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 4430 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 4431 % that starts with \. 4432 % 4433 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 4434 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 4435 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 4436 % 4437 \macrolist 4438} 4439 4440\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. 4441\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? 4442 4443% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. 4444% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 4445\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} 4446 4447% Workhorse for all \fooindexes. 4448% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- 4449% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception 4450% is with most defuns, which call us directly). 4451% 4452\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 4453 \iflinks 4454 {% 4455 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). 4456 \toks0 = {#2}% 4457 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. 4458 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 4459 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else 4460 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% 4461 \fi 4462 % 4463 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 4464 % 4465 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite 4466 }% 4467 \fi 4468} 4469 4470% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: 4471% 4472\def\dosubindwrite{% 4473 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. 4474 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 4475 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% 4476 \fi 4477 % 4478 % Remember, we are within a group. 4479 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage 4480 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now 4481 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. 4482 % 4483 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to 4484 % get the string to sort by. 4485 {\indexnofonts 4486 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion 4487 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% 4488 }% 4489 % 4490 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 4491 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 4492 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 4493 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 4494 % sorted result. 4495 \edef\temp{% 4496 \write\writeto{% 4497 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% 4498 }% 4499 \temp 4500} 4501 4502% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 4503% 4504% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 4505% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 4506% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 4507% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 4508% sequences like this: 4509% @end defun 4510% @tindex whatever 4511% @defun ... 4512% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 4513% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 4514% the previous defun. 4515% 4516% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 4517% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 4518% 4519% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 4520% 4521% But wait, there is a catch there: 4522% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 4523% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 4524% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 4525% representation of the skip. 4526% 4527% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 4528% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 4529% 4530\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 4531% 4532\newskip\whatsitskip 4533\newcount\whatsitpenalty 4534% 4535% ..., ready, GO: 4536% 4537\def\safewhatsit#1{% 4538\ifhmode 4539 #1% 4540\else 4541 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 4542 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 4543 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 4544 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 4545 % 4546 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 4547 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 4548 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 4549 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 4550 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 4551 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4552 \else 4553 \vskip-\whatsitskip 4554 \fi 4555 % 4556 #1% 4557 % 4558 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4559 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 4560 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 4561 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 4562 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 4563 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 4564 % 4565 % @deffn deffn-whatever 4566 % @vindex index-whatever 4567 % Description. 4568 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 4569 % and the "Description." paragraph. 4570 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 4571 \else 4572 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 4573 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 4574 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 4575 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 4576 \fi 4577\fi 4578} 4579 4580% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 4581% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 4582% or 4583% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 4584% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 4585% containing these kinds of lines: 4586% \initial {c} 4587% before the first topic whose initial is c 4588% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 4589% for a topic that is used without subtopics 4590% \primary {topic} 4591% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 4592% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 4593% for each subtopic. 4594 4595% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 4596% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 4597 4598\def\findex {\fnindex} 4599\def\kindex {\kyindex} 4600\def\cindex {\cpindex} 4601\def\vindex {\vrindex} 4602\def\tindex {\tpindex} 4603\def\pindex {\pgindex} 4604 4605\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} 4606{\obeylines % 4607\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % 4608\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} 4609 4610% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 4611 4612% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 4613% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 4614% 4615\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 4616 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 4617 % 4618 \smallfonts \rm 4619 \tolerance = 9500 4620 \plainfrenchspacing 4621 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 4622 % 4623 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 4624 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains 4625 % \initial {@} 4626 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces 4627 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). 4628 \catcode`\@ = 11 4629 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s 4630 \ifeof 1 4631 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 4632 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 4633 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 4634 % there is some text. 4635 \putwordIndexNonexistent 4636 \else 4637 % 4638 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 4639 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 4640 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 4641 \read 1 to \temp 4642 \ifeof 1 4643 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 4644 \else 4645 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape 4646 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change 4647 % to make right now. 4648 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% 4649 \catcode`\\ = 0 4650 \escapechar = `\\ 4651 \begindoublecolumns 4652 \input \jobname.#1s 4653 \enddoublecolumns 4654 \fi 4655 \fi 4656 \closein 1 4657\endgroup} 4658 4659% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 4660% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 4661 4662\def\initial#1{{% 4663 % Some minor font changes for the special characters. 4664 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt 4665 % 4666 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 4667 \removelastskip 4668 % 4669 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 4670 \nobreak 4671 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip 4672 \penalty 0 4673 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip 4674 % 4675 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 4676 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 4677 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 4678 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 4679 % 4680 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 4681 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip 4682 \leftline{\secbf #1}% 4683 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 4684 \nobreak 4685 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 4686}} 4687 4688% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 4689% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 4690% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 4691% 4692% A straightforward implementation would start like this: 4693% \def\entry#1#2{... 4694% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to 4695% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- 4696% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. 4697% 4698% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. 4699% --kasal, 21nov03 4700\def\entry{% 4701 \begingroup 4702 % 4703 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 4704 % affect previous text. 4705 \par 4706 % 4707 % Do not fill out the last line with white space. 4708 \parfillskip = 0in 4709 % 4710 % No extra space above this paragraph. 4711 \parskip = 0in 4712 % 4713 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 4714 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 4715 % 4716 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number 4717 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the 4718 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large 4719 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across 4720 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. 4721 % 4722 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start 4723 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. 4724 \hangindent = 2em 4725 % 4726 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line 4727 % with blank space. 4728 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil 4729 % 4730 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing 4731 % columns. 4732 \vskip 0pt plus1pt 4733 % 4734 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 4735 \afterassignment\doentry 4736 \let\temp = 4737} 4738\def\doentry{% 4739 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 4740 \noindent 4741 \aftergroup\finishentry 4742 % And now comes the text of the entry. 4743} 4744\def\finishentry#1{% 4745 % #1 is the page number. 4746 % 4747 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if 4748 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be 4749 % cursed by a Unix daemon. 4750 \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}% 4751 \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt 4752 \ % 4753 \else 4754 % 4755 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out 4756 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the 4757 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) 4758 \hfil\penalty50 4759 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 4760 % 4761 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as 4762 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull 4763 % \hbox ensues. 4764 \ifpdf 4765 \pdfgettoks#1.% 4766 \ \the\toksA 4767 \else 4768 \ #1% 4769 \fi 4770 \fi 4771 \par 4772 \endgroup 4773} 4774 4775% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 4776\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 4777 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} 4778 4779\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 4780 4781\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm 4782\def\secondary#1#2{{% 4783 \parfillskip=0in 4784 \parskip=0in 4785 \hangindent=1in 4786 \hangafter=1 4787 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill 4788 \ifpdf 4789 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 4790 \else 4791 #2 4792 \fi 4793 \par 4794}} 4795 4796% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 4797% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 4798% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 4799\catcode`\@=11 4800 4801\newbox\partialpage 4802\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 4803 4804\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 4805 % Grab any single-column material above us. 4806 \output = {% 4807 % 4808 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a 4809 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output 4810 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is 4811 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In 4812 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal 4813 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this 4814 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. 4815 \ifvoid\partialpage \else 4816 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% 4817 \fi 4818 % 4819 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 4820 % Unvbox the main output page. 4821 \unvbox\PAGE 4822 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 4823 }% 4824 }% 4825 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 4826 % 4827 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 4828 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 4829 % 4830 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 4831 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 4832 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 4833 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 4834 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 4835 % 4836 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 4837 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 4838 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 4839 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 4840 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 4841 % 4842 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 4843 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 4844 % been clobbered. 4845 % 4846 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 4847 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 4848 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 4849 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 4850 % 4851 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, 4852 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) 4853 \vsize = 2\vsize 4854} 4855 4856% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 4857% the last. 4858% 4859\def\doublecolumnout{% 4860 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 4861 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 4862 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 4863 % previous page. 4864 \dimen@ = \vsize 4865 \divide\dimen@ by 2 4866 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage 4867 % 4868 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 4869 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ 4870 \onepageout\pagesofar 4871 \unvbox255 4872 \penalty\outputpenalty 4873} 4874% 4875% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 4876% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 4877\def\pagesofar{% 4878 \unvbox\partialpage 4879 % 4880 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 4881 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 4882 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 4883} 4884% 4885% All done with double columns. 4886\def\enddoublecolumns{% 4887 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 4888 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 4889 % following situation: 4890 % 4891 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 4892 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 4893 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 4894 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 4895 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 4896 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 4897 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 4898 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 4899 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 4900 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 4901 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 4902 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 4903 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 4904 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 4905 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 4906 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 4907 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 4908 % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see 4909 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 4910 % 4911 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 4912 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 4913 \penalty0 4914 % 4915 \output = {% 4916 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the 4917 % current page, no automatic page break. 4918 \balancecolumns 4919 % 4920 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, 4921 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output 4922 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 4923 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 4924 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be 4925 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes 4926 % the output somewhat more palatable.) 4927 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% 4928 }% 4929 \eject 4930 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 4931 % 4932 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 4933 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 4934 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the 4935 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). 4936 \pagegoal = \vsize 4937} 4938% 4939% Called at the end of the double column material. 4940\def\balancecolumns{% 4941 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 4942 \dimen@ = \ht0 4943 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 4944 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 4945 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 4946 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% 4947 \splittopskip = \topskip 4948 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. 4949 {% 4950 \vbadness = 10000 4951 \loop 4952 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 4953 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 4954 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ 4955 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 4956 \repeat 4957 }% 4958 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% 4959 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% 4960 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% 4961 % 4962 \pagesofar 4963} 4964\catcode`\@ = \other 4965 4966 4967\message{sectioning,} 4968% Chapters, sections, etc. 4969 4970% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered 4971% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 4972% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 4973% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 4974% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 4975\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 4976\newcount\chapno 4977\newcount\secno \secno=0 4978\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 4979\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 4980 4981% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 4982\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 4983% 4984% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 4985% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 4986% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 4987% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 4988% 4989\def\appendixletter{% 4990 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 4991 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 4992 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 4993 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 4994 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 4995 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 4996 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 4997 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 4998 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 4999 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 5000 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 5001 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 5002 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 5003 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 5004 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 5005 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 5006 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 5007 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 5008 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 5009 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 5010 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 5011 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 5012 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 5013 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 5014 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 5015 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 5016 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 5017 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 5018 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 5019 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 5020 \else\char\the\appendixno 5021 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 5022 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 5023 5024% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 5025% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 5026% these. @section does likewise. 5027\def\thischapter{} 5028\def\thischapternum{} 5029\def\thischaptername{} 5030\def\thissection{} 5031\def\thissectionnum{} 5032\def\thissectionname{} 5033 5034\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 5035\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 5036 5037% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 5038\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 5039\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name 5040 5041% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 5042\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 5043\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name 5044 5045% we only have subsub. 5046\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 5047% 5048% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 5049% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 5050\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel 5051% 5052% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 5053% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 5054\def\chapheadtype{N} 5055 5056% Choose a heading macro 5057% #1 is heading type 5058% #2 is heading level 5059% #3 is text for heading 5060\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 5061 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 5062 \absseclevel=#2 5063 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 5064 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 5065 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 5066 \absseclevel = 0 5067 \else 5068 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 5069 \absseclevel = 3 5070 \fi 5071 \fi 5072 % The heading type: 5073 \def\headtype{#1}% 5074 \if \headtype U% 5075 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel 5076 \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel 5077 \fi 5078 \else 5079 % Check for appendix sections: 5080 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 5081 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 5082 \else 5083 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 5084 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 5085 \fi\fi 5086 \fi 5087 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 5088 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel 5089 \def\headtype{U}% 5090 \else 5091 \chardef\unmlevel = 3 5092 \fi 5093 \fi 5094 % Now print the heading: 5095 \if \headtype U% 5096 \ifcase\absseclevel 5097 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 5098 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 5099 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 5100 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 5101 \fi 5102 \else 5103 \if \headtype A% 5104 \ifcase\absseclevel 5105 \appendixzzz{#3}% 5106 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 5107 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 5108 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 5109 \fi 5110 \else 5111 \ifcase\absseclevel 5112 \chapterzzz{#3}% 5113 \or \seczzz{#3}% 5114 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 5115 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 5116 \fi 5117 \fi 5118 \fi 5119 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 5120} 5121 5122% an interface: 5123\def\numhead{\genhead N} 5124\def\apphead{\genhead A} 5125\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 5126 5127% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 5128% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 5129% 5130% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 5131% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 5132\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 5133% 5134\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 5135\def\chapterzzz#1{% 5136 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 5137 % as an @include file. 5138 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 5139 \global\advance\chapno by 1 5140 % 5141 % Used for \float. 5142 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 5143 \resetallfloatnos 5144 % 5145 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. 5146 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% 5147 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% 5148 % 5149 % Write the actual heading. 5150 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 5151 % 5152 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 5153 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 5154 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 5155 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 5156} 5157 5158\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz 5159% 5160\def\appendixzzz#1{% 5161 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 5162 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 5163 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 5164 \resetallfloatnos 5165 % 5166 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. 5167 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% 5168 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% 5169 % 5170 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 5171 % 5172 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 5173 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 5174 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 5175} 5176 5177\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz 5178\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 5179 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 5180 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 5181 % 5182 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 5183 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 5184 \resetallfloatnos 5185 % 5186 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 5187 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 5188 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 5189 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 5190 % to be executed, not expanded). 5191 % 5192 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 5193 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 5194 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 5195 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 5196 % the toc entries.) 5197 \toks0 = {#1}% 5198 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 5199 % 5200 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 5201 % 5202 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 5203 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 5204 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 5205} 5206 5207% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 5208\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 5209 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break 5210 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. 5211 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 5212 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 5213 \unnmhead0{#1}% 5214 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 5215} 5216 5217% @top is like @unnumbered. 5218\let\top\unnumbered 5219 5220% Sections. 5221\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 5222\def\seczzz#1{% 5223 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 5224 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 5225} 5226 5227\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz 5228\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 5229 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 5230 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 5231} 5232\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 5233 5234\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz 5235\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 5236 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 5237 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 5238} 5239 5240% Subsections. 5241\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz 5242\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 5243 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5244 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5245} 5246 5247\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz 5248\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 5249 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5250 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 5251 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5252} 5253 5254\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz 5255\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 5256 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5257 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 5258 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5259} 5260 5261% Subsubsections. 5262\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz 5263\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5264 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5265 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 5266 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5267} 5268 5269\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz 5270\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 5271 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5272 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 5273 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5274} 5275 5276\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz 5277\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5278 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5279 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 5280 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5281} 5282 5283% These macros control what the section commands do, according 5284% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 5285% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 5286\let\section = \numberedsec 5287\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 5288\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 5289 5290% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 5291 5292% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: 5293% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit 5294% overlong headings to fold. 5295% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a 5296% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. 5297% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and 5298% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. 5299 5300\def\majorheading{% 5301 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 5302 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 5303} 5304 5305\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 5306\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 5307 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5308 \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright 5309 \rmisbold #1\hfill}}% 5310 \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax 5311 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 5312} 5313 5314% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 5315\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5316 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5317\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5318 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5319\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5320 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5321 5322% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 5323% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 5324% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 5325 5326%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 5327\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 5328 5329%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it 5330% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 5331 5332\newskip\chapheadingskip 5333 5334\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 5335\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 5336% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 5337% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 5338% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 5339\def\chapoddpage{% 5340 \chappager 5341 \ifodd\pageno \else 5342 \begingroup 5343 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% 5344 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% 5345 \hbox to 0pt{}% 5346 \chappager 5347 \endgroup 5348 \fi 5349} 5350 5351\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 5352 5353\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 5354\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5355\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 5356\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 5357 5358\def\CHAPPAGon{% 5359\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5360\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 5361\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 5362\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 5363 5364\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 5365\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 5366\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 5367\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 5368\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 5369 5370\CHAPPAGon 5371 5372% Chapter opening. 5373% 5374% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 5375% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 5376% 5377% To test against our argument. 5378\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 5379\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 5380\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 5381% 5382\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 5383 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5384 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5385 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5386 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5387 \gdef\thissection{}}% 5388 % 5389 \def\temptype{#2}% 5390 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5391 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5392 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 5393 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5394 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5395 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 5396 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5397 \toks0={#1}% 5398 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5399 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5400 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 5401 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible 5402 % commands in some of the translations. 5403 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} 5404 \noexpand\thischapternum: 5405 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5406 }% 5407 \else 5408 \toks0={#1}% 5409 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5410 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5411 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 5412 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible 5413 % commands in some of the translations. 5414 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} 5415 \noexpand\thischapternum: 5416 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5417 }% 5418 \fi\fi\fi 5419 % 5420 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5421 % the preceding space. 5422 \safewhatsit\domark 5423 % 5424 % Insert the chapter heading break. 5425 \pchapsepmacro 5426 % 5427 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5428 % between here and the heading. 5429 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5430 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5431 \domark 5432 % 5433 {% 5434 \chapfonts \rmisbold 5435 % 5436 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the 5437 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 5438 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 5439 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5440 % 5441 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 5442 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 5443 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5444 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5445 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 5446 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5447 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 5448 \def\toctype{omit}% 5449 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5450 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 5451 \def\toctype{app}% 5452 \else 5453 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 5454 \def\toctype{numchap}% 5455 \fi\fi\fi 5456 % 5457 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 5458 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 5459 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 5460 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 5461 % 5462 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 5463 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 5464 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 5465 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 5466 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 5467 \donoderef{#2}% 5468 % 5469 % Typeset the actual heading. 5470 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 5471 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 5472 \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 5473 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 5474 }% 5475 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 5476 \nobreak 5477} 5478 5479% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 5480\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 5481\def\centerparameters{% 5482 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 5483 \leftskip = \rightskip 5484 \parfillskip = 0pt 5485} 5486 5487 5488% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not 5489% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. 5490% 5491\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} 5492% 5493\def\unnchfopen #1{% 5494\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5495 \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright 5496 \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak 5497} 5498\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts 5499\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% 5500\par\penalty 5000 % 5501} 5502\def\centerchfopen #1{% 5503\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5504 \parindent=0pt 5505 \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak 5506} 5507\def\CHAPFopen{% 5508 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen 5509 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} 5510 5511 5512% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 5513% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 5514% 5515\newskip\secheadingskip 5516\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 5517 5518% Subsection titles. 5519\newskip\subsecheadingskip 5520\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 5521 5522% Subsubsection titles. 5523\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 5524\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 5525 5526 5527% Print any size, any type, section title. 5528% 5529% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is 5530% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the 5531% section number. 5532% 5533\def\seckeyword{sec} 5534% 5535\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 5536 {% 5537 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 5538 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold 5539 % 5540 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 5541 \def\temptype{#3}% 5542 % 5543 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5544 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5545 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5546 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5547 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5548 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 5549 \fi 5550 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5551 % Don't redefine \thissection. 5552 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5553 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5554 \toks0={#1}% 5555 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5556 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5557 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5558 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 5559 % commands in some of the translations. 5560 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 5561 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5562 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5563 }% 5564 \fi 5565 \else 5566 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5567 \toks0={#1}% 5568 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5569 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5570 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5571 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 5572 % commands in some of the translations. 5573 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 5574 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5575 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5576 }% 5577 \fi 5578 \fi\fi\fi 5579 % 5580 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we 5581 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph 5582 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. 5583 \par 5584 % 5585 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5586 % the preceding space. 5587 \safewhatsit\domark 5588 % 5589 % Insert space above the heading. 5590 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 5591 % 5592 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5593 % between here and the heading. 5594 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5595 \domark 5596 % 5597 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 5598 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5599 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5600 \def\toctype{unn}% 5601 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5602 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5603 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 5604 % and don't redefine \lastsection. 5605 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5606 \def\toctype{omit}% 5607 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 5608 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5609 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5610 \def\toctype{app}% 5611 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5612 \else 5613 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5614 \def\toctype{num}% 5615 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5616 \fi\fi\fi 5617 % 5618 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 5619 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 5620 % 5621 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 5622 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 5623 \donoderef{#3}% 5624 % 5625 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 5626 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 5627 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 5628 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 5629 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 5630 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 5631 \nobreak 5632 % 5633 % Output the actual section heading. 5634 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 5635 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 5636 \unhbox0 #1}% 5637 }% 5638 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 5639 % Don't allow stretch, though. 5640 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 5641 % 5642 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 5643 % was followed by glue. 5644 \nobreak 5645 % 5646 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 5647 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 5648 % discardable item.) 5649 \vskip-\parskip 5650 % 5651 % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > 5652 % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after 5653 % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: 5654 % 5655 % @section sec-whatever 5656 % @deffn def-whatever 5657 \penalty 10001 5658} 5659 5660 5661\message{toc,} 5662% Table of contents. 5663\newwrite\tocfile 5664 5665% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 5666% Called from @chapter, etc. 5667% 5668% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 5669% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 5670% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 5671% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 5672% destination to jump to. 5673% 5674% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 5675% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 5676% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 5677% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 5678% 5679\newif\iftocfileopened 5680\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 5681% 5682\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 5683 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 5684 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 5685 \iftocfileopened\else 5686 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 5687 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 5688 \fi 5689 % 5690 \iflinks 5691 {\atdummies 5692 \edef\temp{% 5693 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 5694 \temp 5695 }% 5696 \fi 5697 \fi 5698 % 5699 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 5700 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 5701 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 5702 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 5703 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 5704 % `1', and two named `2'. 5705 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi 5706} 5707 5708 5709% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 5710% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 5711% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 5712% 5713\def\activecatcodes{% 5714 \catcode`\"=\active 5715 \catcode`\$=\active 5716 \catcode`\<=\active 5717 \catcode`\>=\active 5718 \catcode`\\=\active 5719 \catcode`\^=\active 5720 \catcode`\_=\active 5721 \catcode`\|=\active 5722 \catcode`\~=\active 5723} 5724 5725 5726% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 5727\def\readtocfile{% 5728 \setupdatafile 5729 \activecatcodes 5730 \input \tocreadfilename 5731} 5732 5733\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 5734\newcount\savepageno 5735\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 5736 5737% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 5738% 5739\def\startcontents#1{% 5740 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 5741 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 5742 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 5743 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> 5744 \contentsalignmacro 5745 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 5746 % 5747 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 5748 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 5749 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 5750 % 5751 \savepageno = \pageno 5752 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 5753 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 5754 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 5755 % 5756 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 5757 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 5758} 5759 5760% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 5761% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 5762% 5763\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 5764 5765% Normal (long) toc. 5766% 5767\def\contents{% 5768 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 5769 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 5770 \ifeof 1 \else 5771 \readtocfile 5772 \fi 5773 \vfill \eject 5774 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 5775 \ifeof 1 \else 5776 \pdfmakeoutlines 5777 \fi 5778 \closein 1 5779 \endgroup 5780 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 5781 \global\pageno = \savepageno 5782} 5783 5784% And just the chapters. 5785\def\summarycontents{% 5786 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 5787 % 5788 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 5789 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 5790 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 5791 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 5792 \secfonts 5793 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 5794 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 5795 \rm 5796 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 5797 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 5798 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 5799 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 5800 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 5801 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5802 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5803 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5804 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5805 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5806 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5807 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 5808 \ifeof 1 \else 5809 \readtocfile 5810 \fi 5811 \closein 1 5812 \vfill \eject 5813 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 5814 \endgroup 5815 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 5816 \global\pageno = \savepageno 5817} 5818\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 5819 5820% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 5821% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 5822% 5823\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 5824 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 5825 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 5826 % But use \hss just in case. 5827 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 5828 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 5829 % 5830 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 5831 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 5832 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 5833 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 5834 % there are before deciding ... 5835 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 5836} 5837 5838% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 5839% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 5840% The last argument is the page number. 5841% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 5842 5843% Chapters, in the main contents. 5844\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5845% 5846% Chapters, in the short toc. 5847% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 5848\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 5849 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 5850} 5851 5852% Appendices, in the main contents. 5853% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 5854% 5855\def\appendixbox#1{% 5856 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 5857 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 5858 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 5859% 5860\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5861 5862% Unnumbered chapters. 5863\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 5864\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 5865 5866% Sections. 5867\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5868\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 5869\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 5870 5871% Subsections. 5872\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5873\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 5874\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 5875 5876% And subsubsections. 5877\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5878\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 5879\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 5880 5881% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 5882% Same as \defaultparindent. 5883\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 5884 5885% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 5886% page number. 5887% 5888% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 5889% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 5890\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 5891 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 5892 \begingroup 5893 \chapentryfonts 5894 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5895 \endgroup 5896 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 5897} 5898 5899\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5900 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 5901 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5902\endgroup} 5903 5904\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5905 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 5906 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5907\endgroup} 5908 5909\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5910 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 5911 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5912\endgroup} 5913 5914% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 5915\let\tocentry = \entry 5916 5917% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 5918\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 5919 5920\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 5921\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 5922 5923\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 5924\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 5925\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 5926\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 5927 5928 5929\message{environments,} 5930% @foo ... @end foo. 5931 5932% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. 5933% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 5934% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. 5935 5936\envdef\tex{% 5937 \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% 5938 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 5939 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 5940 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 5941 \catcode `\%=14 5942 \catcode `\+=\other 5943 \catcode `\"=\other 5944 \catcode `\|=\other 5945 \catcode `\<=\other 5946 \catcode `\>=\other 5947 \catcode`\`=\other 5948 \catcode`\'=\other 5949 \escapechar=`\\ 5950 % 5951 \let\b=\ptexb 5952 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 5953 \let\c=\ptexc 5954 \let\,=\ptexcomma 5955 \let\.=\ptexdot 5956 \let\dots=\ptexdots 5957 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 5958 \let\!=\ptexexclam 5959 \let\i=\ptexi 5960 \let\indent=\ptexindent 5961 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 5962 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 5963 \let\+=\tabalign 5964 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 5965 \let\/=\ptexslash 5966 \let\*=\ptexstar 5967 \let\t=\ptext 5968 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer 5969 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 5970 % 5971 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 5972 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 5973 \def\@{@}% 5974} 5975% There is no need to define \Etex. 5976 5977% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 5978% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 5979% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 5980 5981% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 5982\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 5983 5984% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 5985% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 5986% have any width. 5987\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 5988 5989% This space is always present above and below environments. 5990\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 5991 5992% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 5993% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 5994% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 5995% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 5996% 5997\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 5998 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 5999 % \sectionheading, q.v. 6000 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 6001 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 6002 \endgraf 6003 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 6004 \removelastskip 6005 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 6006 % or better ... 6007 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 6008 \vskip\envskipamount 6009 \fi 6010 \fi 6011}} 6012 6013\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak 6014 6015% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 6016% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 6017\let\nonarrowing=\relax 6018 6019% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 6020% environment contents. 6021\font\circle=lcircle10 6022\newdimen\circthick 6023\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 6024\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 6025\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 6026% 6027\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 6028\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 6029\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 6030\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 6031\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 6032 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 6033 \hskip\rskip}} 6034\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 6035 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 6036 \hskip\rskip}} 6037% 6038\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 6039 6040\envdef\cartouche{% 6041 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 6042 \startsavinginserts 6043 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 6044 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 6045 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 6046 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 6047 \cartouter=\hsize 6048 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 6049 % side, and for 6pt waste from 6050 % each corner char, and rule thickness 6051 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 6052 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. 6053 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6054 \vbox\bgroup 6055 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 6056 \carttop 6057 \hbox\bgroup 6058 \hskip\lskip 6059 \vrule\kern3pt 6060 \vbox\bgroup 6061 \kern3pt 6062 \hsize=\cartinner 6063 \baselineskip=\normbskip 6064 \lineskip=\normlskip 6065 \parskip=\normpskip 6066 \vskip -\parskip 6067 \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. 6068} 6069\def\Ecartouche{% 6070 \ifhmode\par\fi 6071 \kern3pt 6072 \egroup 6073 \kern3pt\vrule 6074 \hskip\rskip 6075 \egroup 6076 \cartbot 6077 \egroup 6078 \checkinserts 6079} 6080 6081 6082% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 6083% inside a group. 6084\newdimen\nonfillparindent 6085\def\nonfillstart{% 6086 \aboveenvbreak 6087 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy 6088 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 6089 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 6090 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 6091 \parskip = 0pt 6092 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate 6093 % the normal \indent. 6094 \nonfillparindent=\parindent 6095 \parindent = 0pt 6096 \let\indent\nonfillindent 6097 % 6098 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 6099 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 6100 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 6101 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 6102 \else 6103 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 6104 \fi 6105 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 6106} 6107 6108\begingroup 6109\obeyspaces 6110% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake 6111% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally 6112% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after 6113% @indent. 6114\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% 6115\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% 6116\ifx\temp % 6117\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% 6118\else% 6119\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% 6120\fi% 6121}% 6122\endgroup 6123\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} 6124\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} 6125 6126% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 6127% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 6128% This affects the following displayed environments: 6129% @example, @display, @format, @lisp 6130% 6131\def\smallword{small} 6132\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 6133\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 6134\def\setnormaldispenv{% 6135 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 6136 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 6137 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 6138 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 6139 % to change the fonts afterward. 6140 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 6141 \smallexamplefonts \rm 6142 \fi 6143} 6144\def\setsmalldispenv{% 6145 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 6146 \else 6147 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 6148 \smallexamplefonts \rm 6149 \fi 6150} 6151 6152% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 6153% Let's do it by one command: 6154\def\makedispenv #1#2{ 6155 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} 6156 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} 6157 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 6158 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 6159} 6160 6161% Define two synonyms: 6162\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ 6163 \makedispenv{#1}{#3} 6164 \makedispenv{#2}{#3} 6165} 6166 6167% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. 6168% 6169% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 6170% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 6171% 6172\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% 6173 \nonfillstart 6174 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% 6175 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 6176 \gobble % eat return 6177} 6178% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 6179% 6180\makedispenv {display}{% 6181 \nonfillstart 6182 \gobble 6183} 6184 6185% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 6186% 6187\makedispenv{format}{% 6188 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6189 \nonfillstart 6190 \gobble 6191} 6192 6193% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 6194\envdef\flushleft{% 6195 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6196 \nonfillstart 6197 \gobble 6198} 6199\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 6200 6201% @flushright. 6202% 6203\envdef\flushright{% 6204 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6205 \nonfillstart 6206 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill 6207 \gobble 6208} 6209\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 6210 6211 6212% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right 6213% justification. From plain.tex. 6214\envdef\raggedright{% 6215 \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax 6216} 6217\let\Eraggedright\par 6218 6219\envdef\raggedleft{% 6220 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em 6221 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 6222 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 6223 % badness reporting. 6224} 6225\let\Eraggedleft\par 6226 6227\envdef\raggedcenter{% 6228 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em 6229 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 6230 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 6231 % badness reporting. 6232} 6233\let\Eraggedcenter\par 6234 6235 6236% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 6237% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 6238% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 6239% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 6240% 6241\def\quotationstart{% 6242 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 6243 \parindent=0pt 6244 % 6245 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 6246 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 6247 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 6248 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 6249 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 6250 \else 6251 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 6252 \fi 6253 \parsearg\quotationlabel 6254} 6255 6256\envdef\quotation{% 6257 \setnormaldispenv 6258 \quotationstart 6259} 6260 6261\envdef\smallquotation{% 6262 \setsmalldispenv 6263 \quotationstart 6264} 6265\let\Esmallquotation = \Equotation 6266 6267% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 6268% doing normal filling. 6269% 6270\def\Equotation{% 6271 \par 6272 \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else 6273 % indent a bit. 6274 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 6275 \fi 6276 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 6277} 6278 6279% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 6280\def\quotationlabel#1{% 6281 \def\temp{#1}% 6282 \ifx\temp\empty \else 6283 {\bf #1: }% 6284 \fi 6285} 6286 6287 6288% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 6289% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 6290% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 6291% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 6292% 6293% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 6294% 6295% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 6296% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 6297% verbatim line. 6298\def\dospecials{% 6299 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 6300 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 6301 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 6302 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and 6303 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and 6304 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. 6305 %\do\`\do\'% 6306} 6307% 6308% [Knuth] p. 380 6309\def\uncatcodespecials{% 6310 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 6311% 6312% Setup for the @verb command. 6313% 6314% Eight spaces for a tab 6315\begingroup 6316 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6317 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 6318\endgroup 6319% 6320\def\setupverb{% 6321 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6322 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 6323 \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% 6324 \tabeightspaces 6325 % Respect line breaks, 6326 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6327 % make each space count 6328 % must do in this order: 6329 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6330} 6331 6332% Setup for the @verbatim environment 6333% 6334% Real tab expansion 6335\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 6336% 6337\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} 6338% 6339\begingroup 6340 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6341 \gdef\tabexpand{% 6342 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6343 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 6344 \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab 6345 \divide\dimen0 by\tabw 6346 \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 6347 \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 6348 \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox 6349 }% 6350 } 6351\endgroup 6352 6353% start the verbatim environment. 6354\def\setupverbatim{% 6355 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6356 \nonfillstart 6357 % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6358 \tt 6359 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% 6360 \tabexpand 6361 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% 6362 % Respect line breaks, 6363 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6364 % make each space count 6365 % must do in this order: 6366 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6367 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 6368} 6369 6370% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 6371% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 6372% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 6373% 6374% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 6375% 6376% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 6377\begingroup 6378 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 6379 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 6380\endgroup 6381% 6382\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 6383% 6384% 6385% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 6386% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 6387% 6388% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 6389% 6390% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 6391% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 6392% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 6393% 6394% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 6395% 6396\begingroup 6397 \catcode`\ =\active 6398 \obeylines % 6399 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 6400 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 6401 % line in the output. 6402 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 6403 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 6404 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 6405\endgroup 6406% 6407\envdef\verbatim{% 6408 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 6409} 6410\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 6411 6412 6413% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 6414% 6415\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 6416% 6417\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 6418 {% 6419 \makevalueexpandable 6420 \setupverbatim 6421 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 6422 \input #1 6423 \afterenvbreak 6424 }% 6425} 6426 6427% @copying ... @end copying. 6428% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 6429% 6430% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 6431% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 6432% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 6433% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 6434% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 6435% possible is very desirable. 6436% 6437\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 6438\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 6439% 6440\def\insertcopying{% 6441 \begingroup 6442 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 6443 \scanexp\copyingtext 6444 \endgroup 6445} 6446 6447 6448\message{defuns,} 6449% @defun etc. 6450 6451\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 6452\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 6453\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 6454\newcount\defunpenalty 6455 6456% Start the processing of @deffn: 6457\def\startdefun{% 6458 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 6459 \medbreak 6460 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 6461 % following @def command, see below. 6462 \else 6463 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 6464 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 6465 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 6466 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 6467 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 6468 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 6469 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 6470 % 6471 % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 6472 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 6473 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 6474 % @def command. 6475 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6476 % 6477 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 6478 % But do insert the glue. 6479 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 6480 \fi 6481 % 6482 \parindent=0in 6483 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 6484 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 6485} 6486 6487\def\dodefunx#1{% 6488 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 6489 \checkenv#1% 6490 % 6491 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 6492 % It's not a great place, though. 6493 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6494 % 6495 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 6496 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 6497} 6498\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 6499 6500% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 6501% 6502\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 6503 \begingroup 6504 % call \deffnheader: 6505 #1#2 \endheader 6506 % common ending: 6507 \interlinepenalty = 10000 6508 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil 6509 \endgraf 6510 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 6511 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 6512 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 6513 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 6514 \checkparencounts 6515 \endgroup 6516} 6517 6518\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 6519 6520% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 6521% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 6522% 6523\def\makedefun#1{% 6524 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 6525 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 6526 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 6527 \temp 6528} 6529 6530% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader 6531% 6532% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 6533% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 6534% 6535\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 6536 \envdef#1{% 6537 \startdefun 6538 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 6539 }% 6540 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 6541 \def#3% 6542} 6543 6544%%% Untyped functions: 6545 6546% @deffn category name args 6547\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 6548 6549% @deffn category class name args 6550\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6551 6552% \defopon {category on}class name args 6553\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6554 6555% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 6556% 6557\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 6558 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. 6559 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 6560 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 6561} 6562 6563%%% Typed functions: 6564 6565% @deftypefn category type name args 6566\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 6567 6568% @deftypeop category class type name args 6569\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6570 6571% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 6572\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6573 6574% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 6575% 6576\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 6577 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 6578 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 6579} 6580 6581%%% Typed variables: 6582 6583% @deftypevr category type var args 6584\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 6585 6586% @deftypecv category class type var args 6587\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 6588 6589% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 6590\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6591 6592% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 6593% 6594\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 6595 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 6596 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 6597} 6598 6599%%% Untyped variables: 6600 6601% @defvr category var args 6602\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 6603 6604% @defcv category class var args 6605\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 6606 6607% \defcvof {category of}class var args 6608\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 6609 6610%%% Type: 6611% @deftp category name args 6612\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 6613 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 6614 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 6615} 6616 6617% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 6618\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 6619\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 6620\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 6621\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 6622\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 6623\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 6624\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 6625\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 6626\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 6627\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 6628\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 6629 6630% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 6631% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 6632% #2 is the return type, if any. 6633% #3 is the function name. 6634% 6635% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 6636% 6637\def\defname#1#2#3{% 6638 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 6639 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 6640 % 6641 % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps 6642 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 6643 % just below it. 6644 \def\temp{#1}% 6645 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 6646 % 6647 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. 6648 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 6649 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 6650 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 6651 % The continuations: 6652 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 6653 % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) 6654 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 6655 % 6656 % Put the type name to the right margin. 6657 \noindent 6658 \hbox to 0pt{% 6659 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 6660 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 6661 \kern\leftskip 6662 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 6663 }% 6664 % 6665 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 6666 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 6667 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 6668 {% 6669 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 6670 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 6671 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 6672 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 6673 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 6674 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 6675 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 6676 % one has made identifiers using them :). 6677 \df \tt 6678 \def\temp{#2}% return value type 6679 \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi 6680 #3% output function name 6681 }% 6682 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm 6683 % 6684 \boldbrax 6685 % arguments will be output next, if any. 6686} 6687 6688% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 6689% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 6690% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 6691% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 6692% 6693\def\defunargs#1{% 6694 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 6695 % tt for the names. 6696 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 6697 % 6698 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 6699 % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. 6700 \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% 6701 #1% 6702 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 6703} 6704 6705% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 6706% 6707\def\activeparens{% 6708 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 6709 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 6710 \catcode`\&=\active 6711} 6712 6713% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 6714\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 6715 6716% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 6717% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 6718% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 6719{ 6720 \activeparens 6721 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 6722 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 6723 \global\let& = \& 6724 6725 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 6726 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 6727} 6728 6729\newcount\parencount 6730 6731% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 6732\newif\ifampseen 6733\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 6734 6735\def\parenfont{% 6736 \ifampseen 6737 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 6738 % otherwise use the default font. 6739 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 6740 \else 6741 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 6742 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 6743 \sf 6744 \fi 6745} 6746\def\infirstlevel#1{% 6747 \ifampseen 6748 \ifnum\parencount=1 6749 #1% 6750 \fi 6751 \fi 6752} 6753\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 6754 6755\def\opnr{% 6756 \global\advance\parencount by 1 6757 {\parenfont(}% 6758 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 6759} 6760\def\clnr{% 6761 {\parenfont)}% 6762 \infirstlevel \sl 6763 \global\advance\parencount by -1 6764} 6765 6766\newcount\brackcount 6767\def\lbrb{% 6768 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 6769 {\bf[}% 6770} 6771\def\rbrb{% 6772 {\bf]}% 6773 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 6774} 6775 6776\def\checkparencounts{% 6777 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 6778 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 6779} 6780% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 6781% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 6782\def\badparencount{% 6783 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 6784 \global\parencount=0 6785} 6786\def\badbrackcount{% 6787 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 6788 \global\brackcount=0 6789} 6790 6791 6792\message{macros,} 6793% @macro. 6794 6795% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 6796% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 6797\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined 6798 \newwrite\macscribble 6799 \def\scantokens#1{% 6800 \toks0={#1}% 6801 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 6802 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 6803 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 6804 \input \jobname.tmp 6805 } 6806\fi 6807 6808\def\scanmacro#1{% 6809 \begingroup 6810 \newlinechar`\^^M 6811 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces 6812 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex 6813 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active 6814 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had 6815 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears 6816 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 6817 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ 6818 % ... and \example 6819 \spaceisspace 6820 % 6821 % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. 6822 % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX 6823 % --kasal, 29nov03 6824 \scantokens{#1\endinput}% 6825 \endgroup 6826} 6827 6828\def\scanexp#1{% 6829 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% 6830 \temp 6831} 6832 6833\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 6834\newtoks\macname % Macro name 6835\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 6836 6837% List of all defined macros in the form 6838% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... 6839% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 6840% if there is a need. 6841\def\macrolist{} 6842 6843% Add the macro to \macrolist 6844\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 6845\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 6846 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% 6847 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 6848} 6849 6850% Utility routines. 6851% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 6852% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 6853% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 6854% 6855\def\cslet#1#2{% 6856 \expandafter\let 6857 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 6858 \csname#2\endcsname 6859} 6860 6861% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 6862% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 6863{\catcode`\@=11 6864\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 6865\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 6866\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 6867\def\unbrace#1{#1} 6868\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 6869} 6870 6871% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 6872{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 6873\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 6874\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 6875\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 6876} 6877 6878% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 6879% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 6880% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. 6881 6882% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 6883% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 6884% confine the change to the current group. 6885 6886% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 6887% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 6888% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 6889 6890\def\scanctxt{% 6891 \catcode`\"=\other 6892 \catcode`\+=\other 6893 \catcode`\<=\other 6894 \catcode`\>=\other 6895 \catcode`\@=\other 6896 \catcode`\^=\other 6897 \catcode`\_=\other 6898 \catcode`\|=\other 6899 \catcode`\~=\other 6900 \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi 6901} 6902 6903\def\scanargctxt{% 6904 \scanctxt 6905 \catcode`\\=\other 6906 \catcode`\^^M=\other 6907} 6908 6909\def\macrobodyctxt{% 6910 \scanctxt 6911 \catcode`\{=\other 6912 \catcode`\}=\other 6913 \catcode`\^^M=\other 6914 \usembodybackslash 6915} 6916 6917\def\macroargctxt{% 6918 \scanctxt 6919 \catcode`\\=\other 6920} 6921 6922% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 6923% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 6924% where N is the macro parameter number. 6925% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 6926% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 6927 6928{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 6929 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 6930 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 6931} 6932\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 6933 6934\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 6935\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 6936 6937\def\macroxxx#1{% 6938 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 6939 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 6940 \paramno=0% 6941 \else 6942 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 6943 \fi 6944 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 6945 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 6946 \else 6947 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 6948 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 6949 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 6950 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 6951 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 6952 \fi 6953 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 6954 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 6955 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 6956 \fi} 6957 6958\parseargdef\unmacro{% 6959 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 6960 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 6961 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 6962 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 6963 \begingroup 6964 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 6965 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo 6966 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 6967 \endgroup 6968 \else 6969 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 6970 \fi 6971} 6972 6973% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 6974% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 6975% 6976\def\unmacrodo#1{% 6977 \ifx #1\relax 6978 % remove this 6979 \else 6980 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% 6981 \fi 6982} 6983 6984% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a 6985% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 6986% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 6987\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 6988\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 6989\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 6990\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 6991 6992% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist 6993% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah 6994% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. 6995% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 6996 6997% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. 6998% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something 6999% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine 7000% it to # just before using the token list produced. 7001% 7002% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before 7003% the macro is used. 7004 7005\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 7006 \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} 7007\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 7008 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 7009 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 7010 \advance\paramno by 1% 7011 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 7012 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 7013 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 7014 \fi\next} 7015 7016% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. 7017% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 7018 7019\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% 7020{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 7021\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% 7022{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 7023 7024% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and 7025% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. 7026% Much magic with \expandafter here. 7027% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 7028% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. 7029\def\defmacro{% 7030 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 7031 \ifrecursive 7032 \ifcase\paramno 7033 % 0 7034 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7035 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 7036 \or % 1 7037 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7038 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7039 \noexpand\braceorline 7040 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 7041 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 7042 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 7043 \else % many 7044 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7045 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7046 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 7047 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 7048 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 7049 \expandafter\expandafter 7050 \expandafter\xdef 7051 \expandafter\expandafter 7052 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 7053 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 7054 \fi 7055 \else 7056 \ifcase\paramno 7057 % 0 7058 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7059 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 7060 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 7061 \or % 1 7062 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7063 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7064 \noexpand\braceorline 7065 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 7066 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 7067 \egroup 7068 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 7069 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 7070 \else % many 7071 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7072 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7073 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 7074 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 7075 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 7076 \expandafter\expandafter 7077 \expandafter\xdef 7078 \expandafter\expandafter 7079 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 7080 \paramlist{% 7081 \egroup 7082 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 7083 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 7084 \fi 7085 \fi} 7086 7087\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 7088 7089% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a 7090% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole 7091% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence 7092% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) 7093\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 7094\def\braceorlinexxx{% 7095 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else 7096 \expandafter\parsearg 7097 \fi \macnamexxx} 7098 7099 7100% @alias. 7101% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 7102% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 7103\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 7104\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 7105\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 7106 {% 7107 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 7108 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 7109 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 7110 }% 7111 \next 7112} 7113 7114 7115\message{cross references,} 7116 7117\newwrite\auxfile 7118\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 7119\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 7120 7121% @inforef is relatively simple. 7122\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 7123\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 7124 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 7125 7126% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 7127% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 7128% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 7129% @node foo , bar , ... 7130% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 7131% 7132\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 7133% 7134% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 7135% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 7136\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 7137\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} 7138 7139\let\nwnode=\node 7140\let\lastnode=\empty 7141 7142% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 7143% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 7144% 7145\def\donoderef#1{% 7146 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 7147 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 7148 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 7149 \fi 7150} 7151 7152% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 7153% 7154\newcount\savesfregister 7155% 7156\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 7157\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 7158\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 7159 7160% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 7161% anchor), which consists of three parts: 7162% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, 7163% or the anchor name. 7164% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 7165% empty for anchors. 7166% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 7167% 7168% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 7169% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 7170% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 7171% 7172\def\setref#1#2{% 7173 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 7174 \iflinks 7175 {% 7176 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 7177 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 7178 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 7179 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 7180 }% 7181 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% 7182 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 7183 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 7184 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout 7185 }% 7186 \fi 7187} 7188 7189% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 7190% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 7191% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 7192% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 7193% 7194\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 7195\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 7196\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 7197\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 7198 \unsepspaces 7199 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 7200 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 7201 \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 7202 \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 7203 \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt 7204 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 7205 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax 7206 % Use the node name inside the square brackets. 7207 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 7208 \else 7209 % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside 7210 % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. 7211 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 7212 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. 7213 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 7214 \else 7215 \ifhavexrefs 7216 % We know the real title if we have the xref values. 7217 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 7218 \else 7219 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 7220 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 7221 \fi% 7222 \fi 7223 \fi 7224 \fi 7225 % 7226 % Make link in pdf output. 7227 \ifpdf 7228 {\indexnofonts 7229 \turnoffactive 7230 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 7231 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. 7232 \getfilename{#4}% 7233 % 7234 % See comments at \activebackslashdouble. 7235 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% 7236 \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}% 7237 % 7238 \leavevmode 7239 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 7240 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 7241 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% 7242 \else 7243 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% 7244 \fi 7245 }% 7246 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 7247 \fi 7248 % 7249 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 7250 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the 7251 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. 7252 {% 7253 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 7254 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 7255 \indexnofonts 7256 \turnoffactive 7257 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 7258 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 7259 }% 7260 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 7261 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 7262 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 7263 \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt 7264 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 7265 \else 7266 \printedrefname 7267 \fi 7268 % 7269 % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 7270 % "in MANUALNAME". 7271 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 7272 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 7273 \fi 7274 \else 7275 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 7276 % 7277 % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not 7278 % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will 7279 % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 7280 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this 7281 % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it 7282 % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 7283 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 7284 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 7285 \else 7286 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 7287 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 7288 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 7289 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 7290 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 7291 {\turnoffactive 7292 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 7293 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 7294 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 7295 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 7296 }% 7297 % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. 7298 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 7299 % 7300 % But we always want a comma and a space: 7301 ,\space 7302 % 7303 % output the `page 3'. 7304 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 7305 \fi 7306 \fi 7307 \endlink 7308\endgroup} 7309 7310% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 7311% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 7312% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 7313% one that Bob is working on :). 7314% 7315\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 7316 7317% Things referred to by \setref. 7318% 7319\def\Ynothing{} 7320\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 7321\def\Ynumbered{% 7322 \ifnum\secno=0 7323 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 7324 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 7325 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 7326 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 7327 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 7328 \else 7329 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 7330 \fi\fi\fi 7331} 7332\def\Yappendix{% 7333 \ifnum\secno=0 7334 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 7335 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 7336 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 7337 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 7338 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 7339 \else 7340 \putwordSection@tie 7341 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 7342 \fi\fi\fi 7343} 7344 7345% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. 7346% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. 7347% 7348\def\refx#1#2{% 7349 {% 7350 \indexnofonts 7351 \otherbackslash 7352 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 7353 \csname XR#1\endcsname 7354 }% 7355 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 7356 % If not defined, say something at least. 7357 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 7358 \iflinks 7359 \ifhavexrefs 7360 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% 7361 \else 7362 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 7363 \global\warnedxrefstrue 7364 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 7365 \fi 7366 \fi 7367 \fi 7368 \else 7369 % It's defined, so just use it. 7370 \thisrefX 7371 \fi 7372 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 7373} 7374 7375% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's 7376% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid 7377% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. 7378% 7379\def\xrdef#1#2{% 7380 {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current 7381 % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these 7382 % mess up the control sequence name. 7383 \indexnofonts 7384 \turnoffactive 7385 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 7386 }% 7387 % 7388 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref 7389 % 7390 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 7391 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 7392 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 7393 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 7394 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 7395 % 7396 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 7397 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 7398 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 7399 \else 7400 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 7401 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 7402 \fi 7403 % 7404 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 7405 % for later use in \listoffloats. 7406 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 7407 {\safexrefname}}% 7408 \fi 7409} 7410 7411% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 7412% 7413\def\tryauxfile{% 7414 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 7415 \ifeof 1 \else 7416 \readdatafile{aux}% 7417 \global\havexrefstrue 7418 \fi 7419 \closein 1 7420} 7421 7422\def\setupdatafile{% 7423 \catcode`\^^@=\other 7424 \catcode`\^^A=\other 7425 \catcode`\^^B=\other 7426 \catcode`\^^C=\other 7427 \catcode`\^^D=\other 7428 \catcode`\^^E=\other 7429 \catcode`\^^F=\other 7430 \catcode`\^^G=\other 7431 \catcode`\^^H=\other 7432 \catcode`\^^K=\other 7433 \catcode`\^^L=\other 7434 \catcode`\^^N=\other 7435 \catcode`\^^P=\other 7436 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 7437 \catcode`\^^R=\other 7438 \catcode`\^^S=\other 7439 \catcode`\^^T=\other 7440 \catcode`\^^U=\other 7441 \catcode`\^^V=\other 7442 \catcode`\^^W=\other 7443 \catcode`\^^X=\other 7444 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 7445 \catcode`\^^[=\other 7446 \catcode`\^^\=\other 7447 \catcode`\^^]=\other 7448 \catcode`\^^^=\other 7449 \catcode`\^^_=\other 7450 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. 7451 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't 7452 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, 7453 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ 7454 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat 7455 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first 7456 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could 7457 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. 7458 % 7459 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: 7460 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter 7461 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. 7462 % 7463 \catcode`\^=\other 7464 % 7465 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 7466 \catcode`\~=\other 7467 \catcode`\[=\other 7468 \catcode`\]=\other 7469 \catcode`\"=\other 7470 \catcode`\_=\other 7471 \catcode`\|=\other 7472 \catcode`\<=\other 7473 \catcode`\>=\other 7474 \catcode`\$=\other 7475 \catcode`\#=\other 7476 \catcode`\&=\other 7477 \catcode`\%=\other 7478 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 7479 % 7480 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ 7481 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than 7482 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ 7483 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* 7484 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that 7485 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for 7486 % now. --karl, 15jan04. 7487 \catcode`\\=\other 7488 % 7489 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. 7490 {% 7491 \count1=128 7492 \def\loop{% 7493 \catcode\count1=\other 7494 \advance\count1 by 1 7495 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi 7496 }% 7497 }% 7498 % 7499 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 7500 \catcode`\{=1 7501 \catcode`\}=2 7502 \catcode`\@=0 7503} 7504 7505\def\readdatafile#1{% 7506\begingroup 7507 \setupdatafile 7508 \input\jobname.#1 7509\endgroup} 7510 7511 7512\message{insertions,} 7513% including footnotes. 7514 7515\newcount \footnoteno 7516 7517% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 7518% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 7519% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 7520% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 7521% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 7522\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 7523 7524% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. 7525\let\footnotestyle=\comment 7526 7527{\catcode `\@=11 7528% 7529% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 7530\gdef\footnote{% 7531 \let\indent=\ptexindent 7532 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7533 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 7534 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 7535 % 7536 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 7537 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 7538 \let\@sf\empty 7539 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 7540 % 7541 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 7542 \unskip 7543 \thisfootno\@sf 7544 \dofootnote 7545}% 7546 7547% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 7548% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 7549% 7550% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 7551% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 7552% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 7553% 7554\gdef\dofootnote{% 7555 \insert\footins\bgroup 7556 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 7557 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 7558 % So reset some parameters. 7559 \hsize=\pagewidth 7560 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 7561 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 7562 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 7563 \floatingpenalty\@MM 7564 \leftskip\z@skip 7565 \rightskip\z@skip 7566 \spaceskip\z@skip 7567 \xspaceskip\z@skip 7568 \parindent\defaultparindent 7569 % 7570 \smallfonts \rm 7571 % 7572 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 7573 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 7574 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 7575 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 7576 \let\noindent = \relax 7577 % 7578 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 7579 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 7580 \everypar = {\hang}% 7581 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 7582 % 7583 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 7584 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 7585 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 7586 \footstrut 7587 \futurelet\next\fo@t 7588} 7589}%end \catcode `\@=11 7590 7591% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 7592% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 7593% would be lost. 7594% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 7595% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 7596% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 7597 7598% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 7599% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 7600% out prematurely. 7601% 7602\def\startsavinginserts{% 7603 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 7604 \let\insert\saveinsert 7605 \else 7606 \let\checkinserts\relax 7607 \fi 7608} 7609 7610% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 7611% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 7612% 7613\def\saveinsert#1{% 7614 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 7615 \afterassignment\next 7616 % swallow the left brace 7617 \let\temp = 7618} 7619\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 7620\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 7621 7622\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 7623 7624\def\placesaveins#1{% 7625 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 7626 {\box#1}% 7627} 7628 7629% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 7630{ 7631 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 7632 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 7633} 7634 7635% initialization: 7636\def\newsaveins #1{% 7637 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 7638 \next 7639} 7640\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 7641 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 7642 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 7643 \checksaveins #1}% 7644} 7645 7646% initialize: 7647\let\checkinserts\empty 7648\newsaveins\footins 7649\newsaveins\margin 7650 7651 7652% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 7653% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 7654% 7655% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 7656% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 7657% undone and the next image would fail. 7658\openin 1 = epsf.tex 7659\ifeof 1 \else 7660 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 7661 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 7662 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 7663 \input epsf.tex 7664\fi 7665\closein 1 7666% 7667% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 7668\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 7669\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 7670 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 7671 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} 7672% 7673\def\image#1{% 7674 \ifx\epsfbox\undefined 7675 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 7676 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 7677 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 7678 \global\warnednoepsftrue 7679 \fi 7680 \else 7681 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 7682 \fi 7683} 7684% 7685% Arguments to @image: 7686% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 7687% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 7688% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 7689% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 7690% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. 7691\newif\ifimagevmode 7692\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 7693 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 7694 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 7695 % If the image is by itself, center it. 7696 \ifvmode 7697 \imagevmodetrue 7698 \nobreak\medskip 7699 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 7700 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 7701 % above and below. 7702 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 7703 \nobreak 7704 \fi 7705 % 7706 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 7707 % environment such as @quotation is respected. On the other hand, if 7708 % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation. 7709 \noindent 7710 % 7711 % Output the image. 7712 \ifpdf 7713 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 7714 \else 7715 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 7716 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 7717 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 7718 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 7719 \fi 7720 % 7721 \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi % space after the standalone image 7722\endgroup} 7723 7724 7725% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 7726% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 7727% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 7728% 7729\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 7730 7731% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 7732\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 7733 7734% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 7735% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 7736% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 7737% 7738% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 7739% be referable. 7740% 7741% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 7742% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 7743% 7744% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 7745% chapter-level command. 7746\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 7747% 7748\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 7749 \let\thiscaption=\empty 7750 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 7751 % 7752 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 7753 % 7754 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 7755 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 7756 % 7757 \startsavinginserts 7758 % 7759 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 7760 \par 7761 % 7762 \vtop\bgroup 7763 \def\floattype{#1}% 7764 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 7765 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 7766 % 7767 \ifx\floattype\empty 7768 \let\safefloattype=\empty 7769 \else 7770 {% 7771 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 7772 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 7773 \indexnofonts 7774 \turnoffactive 7775 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 7776 }% 7777 \fi 7778 % 7779 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 7780 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7781 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 7782 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 7783 % 7784 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 7785 \global\advance\floatno by 1 7786 % 7787 {% 7788 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the 7789 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 7790 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 7791 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 7792 % lists of floats. 7793 % 7794 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 7795 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 7796 }% 7797 \fi 7798 % 7799 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 7800 \vskip\parskip 7801 % 7802 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 7803 \restorefirstparagraphindent 7804} 7805 7806% we have these possibilities: 7807% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 7808% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 7809% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 7810% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 7811% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 7812% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 7813% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 7814% @float & no caption: 7815% 7816\def\Efloat{% 7817 \let\floatident = \empty 7818 % 7819 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 7820 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 7821 % 7822 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 7823 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7824 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 7825 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 7826 \fi 7827 % the number. 7828 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 7829 \fi 7830 % 7831 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 7832 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 7833 \let\captionline = \floatident 7834 % 7835 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 7836 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 7837 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 7838 \fi 7839 % 7840 % caption text. 7841 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 7842 \fi 7843 % 7844 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 7845 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 7846 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 7847 \vskip.5\parskip 7848 \captionline 7849 % 7850 % Space below caption. 7851 \vskip\parskip 7852 \fi 7853 % 7854 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 7855 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 7856 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7857 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 7858 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 7859 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 7860 {% 7861 \atdummies 7862 % 7863 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M 7864 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so 7865 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. 7866 \scanexp{% 7867 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% 7868 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 7869 \thiscaption 7870 \else 7871 \thisshortcaption 7872 \fi 7873 }% 7874 }% 7875 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 7876 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 7877 }% 7878 \fi 7879 \egroup % end of \vtop 7880 % 7881 % place the captured inserts 7882 % 7883 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning 7884 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly 7885 % float. --kasal, 26may04 7886 % 7887 \checkinserts 7888} 7889 7890% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 7891% 7892\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 7893 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 7894} 7895 7896% @caption, @shortcaption 7897% 7898\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 7899\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 7900\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 7901\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 7902 7903% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 7904% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 7905\def\getfloatno#1{% 7906 \ifx#1\relax 7907 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 7908 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 7909 % 7910 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 7911 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 7912 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 7913 \fi 7914 \let\floatno#1% 7915} 7916 7917% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 7918% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 7919% first read the @float command. 7920% 7921\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 7922 7923% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 7924% distinguish floats from other xref types. 7925\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 7926 7927% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 7928% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 7929% \lastsection value which we \setref above. 7930% 7931\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 7932% 7933% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 7934% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 7935% 7936\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 7937 \def\temp{#1}% 7938 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 7939 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 7940} 7941 7942% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 7943% 7944\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 7945 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 7946 {% 7947 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 7948 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 7949 \indexnofonts 7950 \turnoffactive 7951 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 7952 }% 7953 % 7954 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 7955 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 7956 \ifhavexrefs 7957 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 7958 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 7959 \fi 7960 \else 7961 \begingroup 7962 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 7963 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 7964 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 7965 \endgroup 7966 \fi 7967} 7968 7969% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 7970% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 7971% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 7972% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 7973% 7974% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 7975% they won't appear in the aux file). 7976% 7977\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 7978\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 7979 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 7980 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 7981 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 7982 % in pdf output. 7983 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 7984 % 7985 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 7986 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 7987 \writeentry 7988}} 7989 7990 7991\message{localization,} 7992 7993% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very 7994% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language 7995% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. 7996% 7997{ 7998 \catcode`\_ = \active 7999 \globaldefs=1 8000\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup 8001 \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames 8002 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 8003 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 8004 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 8005 \ifeof 1 8006 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}% 8007 \else 8008 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 8009 \input txi-#1.tex 8010 \fi 8011 \closein 1 8012 \endgroup % end raw TeX 8013\endgroup} 8014% 8015% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 8016% try txi-de.tex. 8017% 8018\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 8019 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 8020 \ifeof 1 8021 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 8022 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 8023 \else 8024 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 8025 \input txi-#1.tex 8026 \fi 8027 \closein 1 8028} 8029}% end of special _ catcode 8030% 8031\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 8032is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current 8033directory should work if nowhere else does.} 8034 8035% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the 8036% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and 8037% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. 8038% 8039% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. 8040% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., 8041% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. 8042% 8043% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all 8044% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in 8045% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the 8046% accented characters problem.) 8047% 8048\catcode`@=11 8049\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% 8050 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. 8051 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax 8052 \message{no patterns for #1}% 8053 \else 8054 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname 8055 \fi 8056 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. 8057 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax 8058 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax 8059} 8060 8061% Helpers for encodings. 8062% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 8063% 8064\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 8065 \count255=128 8066 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 8067 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 8068 \advance\count255 by 1 8069 \repeat 8070} 8071 8072\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 8073 \count255=128 8074 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 8075 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 8076 \advance\count255 by 1 8077 \repeat 8078} 8079 8080% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 8081% according to the specified encoding. 8082% 8083\parseargdef\documentencoding{% 8084 % Encoding being declared for the document. 8085 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 8086 % 8087 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 8088 % to compare them with \ifx. 8089 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 8090 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 8091 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 8092 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 8093 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 8094 % 8095 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 8096 \asciichardefs 8097 % 8098 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 8099 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8100 \lattwochardefs 8101 % 8102 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 8103 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8104 \latonechardefs 8105 % 8106 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 8107 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8108 \latninechardefs 8109 % 8110 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 8111 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8112 \utfeightchardefs 8113 % 8114 \else 8115 \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}% 8116 % 8117 \fi % utfeight 8118 \fi % latnine 8119 \fi % latone 8120 \fi % lattwo 8121 \fi % ascii 8122} 8123 8124% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 8125% the default font encoding (OT1). 8126% 8127\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}} 8128 8129% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 8130\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 8131 8132% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 8133% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 8134% macros containing the character definitions. 8135\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8136% 8137% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 8138\def\latonechardefs{% 8139 \gdef^^a0{~} 8140 \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown} 8141 \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} 8142 \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}} 8143 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 8144 \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}} 8145 \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} 8146 \gdef^^a7{\S} 8147 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 8148 \gdef^^a9{\copyright} 8149 \gdef^^aa{\ordf} 8150 \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft} 8151 \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$} 8152 \gdef^^ad{\-} 8153 \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} 8154 \gdef^^af{\={}} 8155 % 8156 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 8157 \gdef^^b1{$\pm$} 8158 \gdef^^b2{$^2$} 8159 \gdef^^b3{$^3$} 8160 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 8161 \gdef^^b5{$\mu$} 8162 \gdef^^b6{\P} 8163 % 8164 \gdef^^b7{$^.$} 8165 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 8166 \gdef^^b9{$^1$} 8167 \gdef^^ba{\ordm} 8168 % 8169 \gdef^^bb{\guilletright} 8170 \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$} 8171 \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$} 8172 \gdef^^be{$3\over4$} 8173 \gdef^^bf{\questiondown} 8174 % 8175 \gdef^^c0{\`A} 8176 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 8177 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 8178 \gdef^^c3{\~A} 8179 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 8180 \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} 8181 \gdef^^c6{\AE} 8182 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 8183 \gdef^^c8{\`E} 8184 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 8185 \gdef^^ca{\^E} 8186 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 8187 \gdef^^cc{\`I} 8188 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 8189 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 8190 \gdef^^cf{\"I} 8191 % 8192 \gdef^^d0{\DH} 8193 \gdef^^d1{\~N} 8194 \gdef^^d2{\`O} 8195 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 8196 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 8197 \gdef^^d5{\~O} 8198 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 8199 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 8200 \gdef^^d8{\O} 8201 \gdef^^d9{\`U} 8202 \gdef^^da{\'U} 8203 \gdef^^db{\^U} 8204 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 8205 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 8206 \gdef^^de{\TH} 8207 \gdef^^df{\ss} 8208 % 8209 \gdef^^e0{\`a} 8210 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 8211 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 8212 \gdef^^e3{\~a} 8213 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 8214 \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a} 8215 \gdef^^e6{\ae} 8216 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 8217 \gdef^^e8{\`e} 8218 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 8219 \gdef^^ea{\^e} 8220 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 8221 \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 8222 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 8223 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 8224 \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 8225 % 8226 \gdef^^f0{\dh} 8227 \gdef^^f1{\~n} 8228 \gdef^^f2{\`o} 8229 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 8230 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 8231 \gdef^^f5{\~o} 8232 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 8233 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 8234 \gdef^^f8{\o} 8235 \gdef^^f9{\`u} 8236 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 8237 \gdef^^fb{\^u} 8238 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 8239 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 8240 \gdef^^fe{\th} 8241 \gdef^^ff{\"y} 8242} 8243 8244% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 8245\def\latninechardefs{% 8246 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 8247 \latonechardefs 8248 % 8249 \gdef^^a4{\euro} 8250 \gdef^^a6{\v S} 8251 \gdef^^a8{\v s} 8252 \gdef^^b4{\v Z} 8253 \gdef^^b8{\v z} 8254 \gdef^^bc{\OE} 8255 \gdef^^bd{\oe} 8256 \gdef^^be{\"Y} 8257} 8258 8259% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 8260\def\lattwochardefs{% 8261 \gdef^^a0{~} 8262 \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}} 8263 \gdef^^a2{\u{}} 8264 \gdef^^a3{\L} 8265 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 8266 \gdef^^a5{\v L} 8267 \gdef^^a6{\'S} 8268 \gdef^^a7{\S} 8269 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 8270 \gdef^^a9{\v S} 8271 \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S} 8272 \gdef^^ab{\v T} 8273 \gdef^^ac{\'Z} 8274 \gdef^^ad{\-} 8275 \gdef^^ae{\v Z} 8276 \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z} 8277 % 8278 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 8279 \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}} 8280 \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }} 8281 \gdef^^b3{\l} 8282 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 8283 \gdef^^b5{\v l} 8284 \gdef^^b6{\'s} 8285 \gdef^^b7{\v{}} 8286 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 8287 \gdef^^b9{\v s} 8288 \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s} 8289 \gdef^^bb{\v t} 8290 \gdef^^bc{\'z} 8291 \gdef^^bd{\H{}} 8292 \gdef^^be{\v z} 8293 \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z} 8294 % 8295 \gdef^^c0{\'R} 8296 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 8297 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 8298 \gdef^^c3{\u A} 8299 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 8300 \gdef^^c5{\'L} 8301 \gdef^^c6{\'C} 8302 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 8303 \gdef^^c8{\v C} 8304 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 8305 \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}} 8306 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 8307 \gdef^^cc{\v E} 8308 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 8309 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 8310 \gdef^^cf{\v D} 8311 % 8312 \gdef^^d0{\DH} 8313 \gdef^^d1{\'N} 8314 \gdef^^d2{\v N} 8315 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 8316 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 8317 \gdef^^d5{\H O} 8318 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 8319 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 8320 \gdef^^d8{\v R} 8321 \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} 8322 \gdef^^da{\'U} 8323 \gdef^^db{\H U} 8324 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 8325 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 8326 \gdef^^de{\cedilla T} 8327 \gdef^^df{\ss} 8328 % 8329 \gdef^^e0{\'r} 8330 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 8331 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 8332 \gdef^^e3{\u a} 8333 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 8334 \gdef^^e5{\'l} 8335 \gdef^^e6{\'c} 8336 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 8337 \gdef^^e8{\v c} 8338 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 8339 \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}} 8340 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 8341 \gdef^^ec{\v e} 8342 \gdef^^ed{\'\i} 8343 \gdef^^ee{\^\i} 8344 \gdef^^ef{\v d} 8345 % 8346 \gdef^^f0{\dh} 8347 \gdef^^f1{\'n} 8348 \gdef^^f2{\v n} 8349 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 8350 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 8351 \gdef^^f5{\H o} 8352 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 8353 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 8354 \gdef^^f8{\v r} 8355 \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u} 8356 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 8357 \gdef^^fb{\H u} 8358 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 8359 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 8360 \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t} 8361 \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 8362} 8363 8364% UTF-8 character definitions. 8365% 8366% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 8367% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 8368% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 8369% 8370\newcount\countUTFx 8371\newcount\countUTFy 8372\newcount\countUTFz 8373 8374\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 8375 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 8376% 8377\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 8378 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 8379% 8380\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 8381 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 8382 8383\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 8384 \ifx #1\relax 8385 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 8386 \else 8387 \expandafter #1% 8388 \fi 8389} 8390 8391\begingroup 8392 \catcode`\~13 8393 \catcode`\"12 8394 8395 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 8396 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 8397 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 8398 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 8399 \advance\countUTFx by 1 8400 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 8401 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 8402 \fi} 8403 8404 \countUTFx = "C2 8405 \countUTFy = "E0 8406 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8407 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}} 8408 \UTFviiiLoop 8409 8410 \countUTFx = "E0 8411 \countUTFy = "F0 8412 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8413 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}} 8414 \UTFviiiLoop 8415 8416 \countUTFx = "F0 8417 \countUTFy = "F4 8418 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8419 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}} 8420 \UTFviiiLoop 8421\endgroup 8422 8423\begingroup 8424 \catcode`\"=12 8425 \catcode`\<=12 8426 \catcode`\.=12 8427 \catcode`\,=12 8428 \catcode`\;=12 8429 \catcode`\!=12 8430 \catcode`\~=13 8431 8432 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{% 8433 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 8434 \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}% 8435 \begingroup 8436 \parseXMLCharref 8437 \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{% 8438 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}% 8439 \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{% 8440 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}% 8441 \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{% 8442 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}% 8443 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 8444 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 8445 \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 8446 \endgroup} 8447 8448 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 8449 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 8450 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8451 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 8452 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 8453 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8454 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,% 8455 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 8456 \parseUTFviiiA;% 8457 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8458 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}% 8459 \else 8460 \parseUTFviiiA;% 8461 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8462 \parseUTFviiiA!% 8463 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}% 8464 \fi\fi\fi 8465 } 8466 8467 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 8468 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 8469 \divide\countUTFz by 64 8470 \countUTFy = \countUTFz 8471 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 8472 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 8473 \advance\countUTFx by 128 8474 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 8475 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 8476 8477 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 8478 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 8479 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 8480 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 8481\endgroup 8482 8483\def\utfeightchardefs{% 8484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie} 8485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown} 8486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds} 8487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }} 8488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright} 8489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf} 8490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft} 8491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-} 8492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol} 8493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }} 8494 8495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }} 8496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }} 8497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }} 8498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm} 8499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright} 8500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown} 8501 8502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A} 8503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A} 8504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A} 8505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A} 8506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A} 8507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA} 8508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE} 8509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}} 8510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E} 8511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E} 8512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E} 8513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E} 8514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I} 8515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I} 8516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I} 8517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I} 8518 8519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH} 8520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N} 8521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O} 8522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O} 8523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O} 8524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O} 8525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O} 8526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O} 8527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U} 8528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U} 8529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U} 8530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U} 8531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y} 8532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH} 8533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss} 8534 8535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a} 8536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a} 8537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a} 8538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a} 8539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a} 8540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa} 8541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae} 8542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}} 8543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e} 8544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e} 8545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e} 8546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e} 8547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}} 8548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}} 8549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}} 8550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}} 8551 8552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh} 8553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n} 8554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o} 8555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o} 8556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o} 8557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o} 8558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o} 8559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o} 8560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u} 8561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u} 8562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u} 8563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u} 8564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y} 8565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th} 8566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y} 8567 8568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A} 8569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a} 8570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}} 8571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}} 8572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}} 8573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}} 8574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C} 8575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c} 8576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C} 8577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c} 8578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}} 8579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}} 8580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}} 8581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}} 8582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}} 8583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}} 8584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}} 8585 8586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E} 8587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e} 8588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}} 8589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}} 8590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}} 8591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}} 8592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}} 8593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}} 8594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G} 8595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g} 8596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}} 8597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}} 8598 8599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}} 8600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}} 8601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H} 8602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h} 8603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I} 8604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}} 8605 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I} 8606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}} 8607 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}} 8608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}} 8609 8610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}} 8611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}} 8612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ} 8613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij} 8614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J} 8615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}} 8616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L} 8617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l} 8618 8619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L} 8620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l} 8621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N} 8622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n} 8623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}} 8624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}} 8625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O} 8626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o} 8627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}} 8628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}} 8629 8630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}} 8631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}} 8632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE} 8633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe} 8634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R} 8635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r} 8636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}} 8637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}} 8638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S} 8639 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s} 8640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S} 8641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s} 8642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}} 8643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}} 8644 8645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}} 8646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}} 8647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}} 8648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}} 8649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}} 8650 8651 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U} 8652 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u} 8653 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U} 8654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u} 8655 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}} 8656 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}} 8657 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}} 8658 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}} 8659 8660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}} 8661 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}} 8662 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W} 8663 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w} 8664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y} 8665 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y} 8666 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y} 8667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z} 8668 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z} 8669 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}} 8670 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}} 8671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}} 8672 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}} 8673 8674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}} 8675 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}} 8676 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}} 8677 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ} 8678 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj} 8679 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj} 8680 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ} 8681 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj} 8682 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj} 8683 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}} 8684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}} 8685 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}} 8686 8687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}} 8688 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}} 8689 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}} 8690 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}} 8691 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}} 8692 8693 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}} 8694 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}} 8695 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}} 8696 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}} 8697 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}} 8698 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}} 8699 8700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}} 8701 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ} 8702 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz} 8703 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz} 8704 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G} 8705 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g} 8706 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N} 8707 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n} 8708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}} 8709 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}} 8710 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}} 8711 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}} 8712 8713 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}} 8714 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}} 8715 8716 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}} 8717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}} 8718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}} 8719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}} 8720 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}} 8721 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}} 8722 8723 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y} 8724 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y} 8725 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}} 8726 8727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }} 8728 8729 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}} 8730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}} 8731 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}} 8732 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}} 8733 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}} 8734 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}} 8735 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}} 8736 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}} 8737 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}} 8738 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}} 8739 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}} 8740 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}} 8741 8742 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}} 8743 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}} 8744 8745 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G} 8746 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g} 8747 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}} 8748 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}} 8749 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}} 8750 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}} 8751 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H} 8752 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h} 8753 8754 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K} 8755 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k} 8756 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}} 8757 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}} 8758 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}} 8759 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}} 8760 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}} 8761 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}} 8762 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}} 8763 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}} 8764 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M} 8765 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m} 8766 8767 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}} 8768 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}} 8769 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}} 8770 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}} 8771 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}} 8772 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}} 8773 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}} 8774 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}} 8775 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}} 8776 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}} 8777 8778 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P} 8779 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p} 8780 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}} 8781 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}} 8782 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}} 8783 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}} 8784 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}} 8785 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}} 8786 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}} 8787 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}} 8788 8789 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}} 8790 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}} 8791 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}} 8792 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}} 8793 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}} 8794 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}} 8795 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}} 8796 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}} 8797 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}} 8798 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}} 8799 8800 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V} 8801 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v} 8802 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}} 8803 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}} 8804 8805 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W} 8806 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w} 8807 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W} 8808 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w} 8809 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W} 8810 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w} 8811 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}} 8812 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}} 8813 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}} 8814 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}} 8815 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}} 8816 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}} 8817 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X} 8818 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x} 8819 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}} 8820 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}} 8821 8822 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z} 8823 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z} 8824 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}} 8825 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}} 8826 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}} 8827 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}} 8828 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}} 8829 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t} 8830 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}} 8831 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}} 8832 8833 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}} 8834 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}} 8835 8836 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}} 8837 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}} 8838 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E} 8839 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e} 8840 8841 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}} 8842 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}} 8843 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}} 8844 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}} 8845 8846 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}} 8847 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}} 8848 8849 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y} 8850 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y} 8851 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}} 8852 8853 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y} 8854 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y} 8855 8856 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--} 8857 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---} 8858 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft} 8859 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright} 8860 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase} 8861 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft} 8862 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright} 8863 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase} 8864 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet} 8865 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots} 8866 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft} 8867 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright} 8868 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro} 8869 8870 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion} 8871 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result} 8872 8873 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus} 8874 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point} 8875 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv} 8876}% end of \utfeightchardefs 8877 8878 8879% US-ASCII character definitions. 8880\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 8881 \relax 8882} 8883 8884% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with 8885% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a 8886% document encoding. 8887% 8888\setnonasciicharscatcode \other 8889 8890 8891\message{formatting,} 8892 8893\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 8894 8895\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 8896\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 8897\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 8898 8899% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 8900\vbadness = 10000 8901 8902% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 8903\hbadness = 2000 8904 8905% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 8906\widowpenalty=10000 8907\clubpenalty=10000 8908 8909% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 8910% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 8911% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 8912% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 8913% 8914\def\setemergencystretch{% 8915 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 8916 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 8917 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 8918 \else 8919 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 8920 \fi 8921} 8922 8923% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 8924% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 8925% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 8926% 8927% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 8928% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 8929% 8930\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 8931 \voffset = #3\relax 8932 \topskip = #6\relax 8933 \splittopskip = \topskip 8934 % 8935 \vsize = #1\relax 8936 \advance\vsize by \topskip 8937 \outervsize = \vsize 8938 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 8939 \pageheight = \vsize 8940 % 8941 \hsize = #2\relax 8942 \outerhsize = \hsize 8943 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 8944 \pagewidth = \hsize 8945 % 8946 \normaloffset = #4\relax 8947 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 8948 % 8949 \ifpdf 8950 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 8951 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 8952 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 8953 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 8954 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 8955 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 8956 \fi 8957 % 8958 \setleading{\textleading} 8959 % 8960 \parindent = \defaultparindent 8961 \setemergencystretch 8962} 8963 8964% @letterpaper (the default). 8965\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 8966 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 8967 \textleading = 13.2pt 8968 % 8969 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 8970 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 8971 {\voffset}{.25in}% 8972 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 8973 {11in}{8.5in}% 8974}} 8975 8976% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 8977\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 8978 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 8979 \textleading = 12pt 8980 % 8981 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 8982 {-.2in}{0in}% 8983 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 8984 {9.25in}{7in}% 8985 % 8986 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 8987 \tolerance = 700 8988 \hfuzz = 1pt 8989 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8990 \defbodyindent = .5cm 8991}} 8992 8993% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 8994% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 8995\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 8996 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 8997 \textleading = 12pt 8998 % 8999 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 9000 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 9001 {0pt}{14pt}% 9002 {9in}{6in}% 9003 % 9004 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 9005 \tolerance = 700 9006 \hfuzz = 1pt 9007 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9008 \defbodyindent = .4cm 9009}} 9010 9011% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 9012\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 9013 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 9014 \textleading = 13.2pt 9015 % 9016 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 9017 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 9018 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 9019 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 9020 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 9021 % your texinfo source file like this: 9022 % @tex 9023 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 9024 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 9025 % @end tex 9026 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 9027 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 9028 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 9029 {297mm}{210mm}% 9030 % 9031 \tolerance = 700 9032 \hfuzz = 1pt 9033 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9034 \defbodyindent = 5mm 9035}} 9036 9037% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 9038% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 9039% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 9040\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 9041 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 9042 \textleading = 12.5pt 9043 % 9044 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 9045 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 9046 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 9047 {210mm}{148mm}% 9048 % 9049 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 9050 \tolerance = 800 9051 \hfuzz = 1.2pt 9052 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9053 \defbodyindent = 2mm 9054 \tableindent = 12mm 9055}} 9056 9057% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 9058\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 9059 \afourpaper 9060 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 9061 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 9062 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 9063 {297mm}{210mm}% 9064 % 9065 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 9066 \globaldefs = 0 9067}} 9068 9069% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 9070\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 9071 \afourpaper 9072 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 9073 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 9074 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 9075 {297mm}{210mm}% 9076 \globaldefs = 0 9077}} 9078 9079% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 9080% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 9081% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 9082% 9083\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 9084\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 9085 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 9086 \globaldefs = 1 9087 % 9088 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 9089 \setleading{\textleading}% 9090 % 9091 \dimen0 = #1\relax 9092 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 9093 % 9094 \dimen2 = \hsize 9095 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 9096 % 9097 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 9098 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 9099 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 9100 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 9101}} 9102 9103% Set default to letter. 9104% 9105\letterpaper 9106 9107 9108\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 9109 9110% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. 9111\catcode`\^^? = 14 9112 9113% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 9114\catcode`\"=\other 9115\catcode`\~=\other 9116\catcode`\^=\other 9117\catcode`\_=\other 9118\catcode`\|=\other 9119\catcode`\<=\other 9120\catcode`\>=\other 9121\catcode`\+=\other 9122\catcode`\$=\other 9123\def\normaldoublequote{"} 9124\def\normaltilde{~} 9125\def\normalcaret{^} 9126\def\normalunderscore{_} 9127\def\normalverticalbar{|} 9128\def\normalless{<} 9129\def\normalgreater{>} 9130\def\normalplus{+} 9131\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 9132 9133% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 9134% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 9135% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 9136% 9137% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 9138% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 9139% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 9140% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 9141% 9142\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 9143 9144% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 9145% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 9146% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 9147% this is not a problem. 9148\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 9149 9150% Turn off all special characters except @ 9151% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). 9152% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 9153% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 9154 9155\catcode`\"=\active 9156\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 9157\let"=\activedoublequote 9158\catcode`\~=\active 9159\def~{{\tt\char126}} 9160\chardef\hat=`\^ 9161\catcode`\^=\active 9162\def^{{\tt \hat}} 9163 9164\catcode`\_=\active 9165\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 9166\let\realunder=_ 9167% Subroutine for the previous macro. 9168\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 9169 9170\catcode`\|=\active 9171\def|{{\tt\char124}} 9172\chardef \less=`\< 9173\catcode`\<=\active 9174\def<{{\tt \less}} 9175\chardef \gtr=`\> 9176\catcode`\>=\active 9177\def>{{\tt \gtr}} 9178\catcode`\+=\active 9179\def+{{\tt \char 43}} 9180\catcode`\$=\active 9181\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 9182 9183% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 9184% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 9185% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. 9186% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. 9187\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} 9188 9189% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 9190% parsing them. 9191\def\turnoffactive{% 9192 \normalturnoffactive 9193 \otherbackslash 9194} 9195 9196\catcode`\@=0 9197 9198% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 9199% as in \char`\\. 9200\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 9201\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work 9202 9203% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and 9204% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). 9205{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} 9206 9207% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 9208% in fixed width font. 9209\catcode`\\=\active 9210@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}} 9211% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: 9212% @let \ = @normalbackslash 9213 9214% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. 9215% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 9216% catcode other. 9217@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} 9218@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 9219 9220% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 9221% the literal character `\'. 9222% 9223@def@normalturnoffactive{% 9224 @let\=@normalbackslash 9225 @let"=@normaldoublequote 9226 @let~=@normaltilde 9227 @let^=@normalcaret 9228 @let_=@normalunderscore 9229 @let|=@normalverticalbar 9230 @let<=@normalless 9231 @let>=@normalgreater 9232 @let+=@normalplus 9233 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 9234 @markupsetuplqdefault 9235 @markupsetuprqdefault 9236 @unsepspaces 9237} 9238 9239% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. 9240% This is canceled by @fixbackslash. 9241@otherifyactive 9242 9243% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 9244% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 9245% a backslash. 9246% 9247@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} 9248@global@let\ = @eatinput 9249 9250% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then 9251% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix 9252% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. 9253% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 9254% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 9255% 9256@gdef@fixbackslash{% 9257 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi 9258 @catcode`+=@active 9259 @catcode`@_=@active 9260} 9261 9262% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 9263@escapechar = `@@ 9264 9265% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 9266@catcode`@& = @other 9267@catcode`@# = @other 9268@catcode`@% = @other 9269 9270@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and 9271@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we 9272@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. 9273@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. 9274@catcode`@'=@active 9275@catcode`@`=@active 9276@markupsetuplqdefault 9277@markupsetuprqdefault 9278 9279@c Local variables: 9280@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) 9281@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" 9282@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 9283@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 9284@c time-stamp-end: "}" 9285@c End: 9286 9287@c vim:sw=2: 9288 9289@ignore 9290 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 9291@end ignore 9292
